JP6524043B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display means is a specific display result. There is one configured to give the player a player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (favorable condition)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area different from the predetermined area (start winning opening) through which the game medium (game ball) can pass, and a special entry portion into which the game medium can enter after passing through the special area There is one that has been configured. For example, according to Patent Document 1, a large entrance ball slot provided with a special winning opening (special area) where entry of the game ball is a trigger for winning the winning ball and a design and function as a pseudo large winning hole ( It is described that the game ball is provided at a position (right under the special winning opening) where the game ball having the large entry ball entrance into the special winning opening can enter the special entering portion). Also, when the large entry ball opening is in a closed state, the game ball entering the special winning opening passes through the front of the large entry ball opening without flowing into the large entry ball opening and flows to the out outlet as it is Is described.

JP, 2015-58194, A (paragraph 0023, 0025-002 7, FIG. 1)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the game medium which has not entered the special entry section is discharged from the lowermost normal discharge area (out port) of the gaming machine board, the other than the special entry section It may be confused with the game media that is discharged without passing or entering a predetermined area (start winning opening) or other areas (normal winning opening or big winning opening), which may cause a misunderstanding that the player is lost. is there.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can suppress giving a misunderstanding that a player is lost.

(Means 1) The gaming machine of Means 1 is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.), through which gaming media (for example, gaming balls) can pass. Predetermined area (for example, the first start winning opening 13, the second start winning opening 14) and a special area (for example, the normal winning gate 33) different from the predetermined area through which the game medium can pass, and the game medium is the special Special entry part (for example, variable ball entry device 22) which can enter after passing through the area, and a plurality of electronic parts (for example, drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoid, sensor, second lamp part 90202, third lamp Control unit for controlling the unit 90203, the fourth lamp unit 90204, the fifth lamp unit 90205, etc. (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP 90123A, IC for exclusive use, etc.); Based on the control signal outputted from the stage, said output means for outputting a driving signal for driving the electronic components (e.g., a serial-parallel conversion IC9091B~9095B etc.) provided with the said output means, a control signal in response to the input (e.g., time t1 in FIG. 56) a predetermined time period from (e.g., the predetermined period T in FIG. 56) stop means for stopping output of the drive signal after a lapse: (Fig. 56 timeout feature), the And setting means for setting whether or not it is effective to stop the output of the drive signal by the stopping means, and the control means outputs a control signal to cause the electronic component to go beyond the predetermined period. when driving continuously for, while from the output of the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (e.g., between time t1 and the predetermined period T elapses), once again, the control signal Is output, and the predetermined area starts variable display by passing the game medium and the game medium is provided (for example, based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14) While the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started, one award ball is paid out), while the variable display is not started even if the game medium passes through the special area, the game medium Passes the game medium (for example, three prize balls are paid out based on the passage of the game balls of the normal prize gate 33, but does not become a start trigger of symbol variation), and passes the special area It was Although obtain Bei special discharge area for discharging the game medium has not entered into the special entry portion (e.g., the second out-port 25).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress giving the player a misunderstanding that he has lost. Moreover, since the operation failure of the electronic component can be avoided, the electronic component can be controlled more stably.

(Means 2) In Means 1,
The special discharge area (for example, the first out port 26) different from the special discharge area is provided, and the special discharge area is disposed in the vicinity of the special entry part as compared to the normal discharge area (for example, As shown in FIG. 2, compared with the first out port 26 provided below the game area 7, the second out port 25 provided in the inside of the winning combination 50 closer to the variable ball entry device 22 is discharged. ) May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear to the player not to lose.

(Means 3) In Measures 1 or 2
The special entry portion is a variable entry device (for example, a variable entry device 22) that can change to a state (for example, an open state) in which gaming media can be entered when being controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit gaming state) It may be configured to be formed as.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a predetermined state.

(Means 4) In any one of Measures 1 to 3,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device) that can change between a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can win and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media can not win or can not win. 20) and
Variable winning means control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S 1414 and S 1465 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) for changing the variable winning means to the first state when being controlled to an advantageous state;
Special entry part control means (for example, steps S1912, S2924, and the like in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) for changing the special entry part (for example, variable entry device 22) to a state (for example, open state) where game media can enter Part that executes S3944),
The special entry part control means changes the special entry part into a state where game media can enter according to the same cycle as changing the variable winning means to the first state (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Is executed based on the fact that the special winning opening open flag is set by executing Y and S1912 in step S1901 and Y and S3944 in S3902 (based on the special variable winning ball device 20 being controlled to the open state). A flag is set after opening the special winning opening by controlling the variable ball entry device 22 in the open state and executing Y and S2924 in step S2901 (the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled in the closed state) Control of the variable ball entry device 22 in a closed state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize a cycle in which the special entry portion changes to a state in which game media can be entered.

(Means 5) In any one of Measures 1 to 4,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device) that can change between a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can win and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media can not win or can not win. 20) and
Variable winning means control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S 1414 and S 1465 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) for changing the variable winning means to the first state when being controlled to an advantageous state;
Special entry part control means (for example, steps S1912, S2924, and the like in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) for changing the special entry part (for example, variable entry device 22) to a state (for example, open state) where game media can enter Part that executes S3944),
The variable winning means control means changes the variable winning means into the first state, and then the variable winning means is at least based on the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game media being won in the variable winning means. Can be controlled to the second state (for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control shifts to the processing of step S1465 when Y is in step S1462),
After the special entry portion control means changes the special entry portion into a state where game media can enter, the game media can not enter the special entry portion even if a predetermined number of game media enters the special entry portion. In the process during the round shown in FIG. 37 executed by the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, the determination process corresponding to step S1462 is not provided, and control to change to the variable ball entry device 22 is not performed. Processing for controlling the variable ball entry device 22 in the closed state according to the number of ball entry of

  According to such a configuration, since the number of game media entering the special entry unit is not limited, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 6) In any one of Measures 1 to 5,
Variable winning means (e.g., for example, open state) in which game media (e.g., game balls) can win, and variable second means (e.g., closed state) in which game media can not win or can not win. , Special variable winning ball device 20 (big winning opening)),
The variable winning means is changed to the first state until at least one of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game media is won. Can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) to execute a possible unit game (for example, round) 15 times a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times for 15 R probability variation big hits, 8 times for 8R probability variation big hits) Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion of the gaming control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S305 to S307);
A value giving means for giving a predetermined value when a game medium has won on the variable winning means (for example, a portion for executing step S32 in the game control microcomputer 560 and the number of prize balls in the payout control microcomputer A portion for driving the ball dispensing device 97 in accordance with the dispensing control command shown),
Notification means for performing a notification corresponding to a value that can be provided in an advantageous state (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S3304A, S3507, and S3939A);
State display means (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control) that can execute state display that changes when the game medium wins the variable winning means toward a specific state (for example, “0” display) corresponding to the notification And the step of executing steps S2910A, S3924A, and S3939A).
The status display means limits the change of the status display when the game media wins a specified number more than the predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous status (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control at Y in step S3920) At one time, it may be configured to not change the status display.

  According to such a configuration, in order to limit the change to the variable winning means when the game medium has won a specified number more than the predetermined number, the size of the value notified as being able to be granted, and the actually granted It is possible to prevent the occurrence of contradiction with the size of the value notified as.

  In addition, the embodiments of the invention described below include the inventions according to the following means 7 to 14. Conventionally, as a motor provided in a game machine, there is one using a stepping motor having a plurality of exciting coils to which voltage pulses are individually supplied. For example, in JP 2011-104147 A, a voltage pulse signal is individually supplied to each exciting coil of the stepping motor according to a control signal for controlling the operation of the stepping motor, and a voltage pulse signal is supplied to each exciting coil In addition, it is shown that the operation abnormality of the stepping motor is determined based on a feedback signal which is a single signal corresponding to the input state of each voltage pulse signal input in parallel and in parallel. However, in the motor provided in this gaming machine, there is a possibility that the operation of the electronic component becomes unstable if the control signal for controlling the operation of the electronic component such as the stepping motor is interrupted unintentionally. is there. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of operating the electronic components provided in the gaming machine more stably.

(Means 7) Another aspect of the gaming machine for achieving the above object, wherein the gaming machine of means 7 is:
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.),
Control means (for example, drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoids, sensors, second lamp unit 90202, third lamp unit 90203, fourth lamp unit 90204, fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP 90123 A, dedicated IC, etc.),
And output means (for example, serial-to-parallel conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B) for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means.
The output means stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period T in FIG. 56) elapses from the reception of the control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 56) (FIG. 56: timeout) Function),
When the control means outputs a control signal to continuously drive the electronic component over the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). The control signal is output during the lapse of a predetermined period T).

  According to such a configuration, the operation failure of the electronic component can be avoided, so that the electronic component can be controlled more stably.

(Means 8) In Means 8,
The output means may include conversion means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B, etc.) for converting a control signal of serial signal system output from the control means into a drive signal of parallel signal system.

According to such a configuration, the number of communication wires between the control means and the output means can be reduced.
(Means 9) in measures 7 or 8
The control unit may further include setting means for setting the stopping means to be valid or invalid (a predetermined terminal for setting the time-out function of each conversion IC to be valid or invalid, effect control board 9012 or the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the function of the stopping means to be valid or invalid according to the application, so that cost reduction can be achieved by commonizing parts.

(Means 10) In any of Measures 7 to 9,
A first substrate (for example, effect control substrate 9012 or the like) provided with the control means;
And a second substrate (e.g., a first lamp substrate 90210) provided with the output unit.
The first substrate and the second substrate may be electrically connected via a wiring member (flexure, harness or the like).

  According to such a configuration, since it is disposed on another substrate, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a control abnormality that may occur due to a wiring failure (such as disconnection or short circuit).

(Means 11) In any of Measures 7 to 10,
The output means controls the drive of the electronic component by outputting a PWM signal as a drive signal (for example, the drive signal is PWM controlled by the number of times of the Low signal, and the light emission luminance of each LED is light emission by PWM control) Gradation control may be performed depending on the period.

  According to such a configuration, power efficiency can be improved by PWM control.

(Means 12) In any of measures 7 to 11,
The output means is
The output state when the input control signal is output to another output means is a first output state where the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the output state of the normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58A), It can be set to any output state with the second output state (for example, the output state with low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58 (b), etc.) where the waveform rises in a gradual change mode than the first output state.
When the other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means, the other output means is set to the second output state (for example, connected in the substrate like the conversion IC 9092 B and the conversion IC 9093 B) In this case, the conversion IC 9092B may be set to output a low through rate waveform).

  According to such a configuration, since the output state when outputting in the same substrate is set to the second output state, the radiation of noise to the outside of the substrate can be suppressed.

(Means 13) In any of Measures 7 to 11,
The output means is
The output state when the input control signal is output to another output means is a first output state where the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the output state of the normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58A), It can be set to any output state with the second output state (for example, the output state with low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58 (b), etc.) where the waveform rises in a gradual change mode than the first output state.
When the other output means is provided on another substrate connected to the substrate on which the output means is provided via the wiring member, the first output state is set (for example, serial If the parallel conversion IC 9094 B and the serial-parallel conversion IC 9095 B are connected outside the substrate, the conversion IC 9094 B may be set to output a waveform of the normal slew rate).

  According to such a configuration, since the output state when outputting to another substrate connected via the wiring member is set to the first output state, the influence of external noise on the control signal can be suppressed. Can.

(Means 14) In any of measures 7 to 13,
It further comprises a movable member (for example, effect unit 90300 etc.) that operates.
The output unit outputs a parallel communication specific signal from specific signal output units (for example, terminals Q0 to 23 corresponding to groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 61) grouped into a plurality of different groups,
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, the PWM clock signals of groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 61 are shifted in period by 1 MHz),
The drive means (for example, motor of drive mechanism 90201 etc.) which operates the movable member is the terminal (for example, terminals Q0 to Q3) of the group belonging to the same cycle of the same group of the output means (for example, same cycle) May be driven based on the specific signal output from.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the radiation of noise to the outside of the substrate by shifting the output period of the specific signal in the parallel communication system.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is an explanatory view for explaining a winning combination. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a presentation control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a presentation control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning opening opening pre-processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the production | presentation symbol in a presentation display apparatus. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of a process table. It is a flow chart which shows the production design fluctuation stop processing in the production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball alerting | reporting start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notification pattern determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit display process in production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the round in production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end production processing in production control process processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a display of an effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of a normal winning a prize display. It is the front view which looked at a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine of FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example etc. of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. (A) is a front view showing a rendering unit, (B) is a rear view. (A) is a front view which shows the state in which a movable part exists in an inclining position, (B) is a front view which shows the state which a movable part exists in an upright position. It is a figure which shows the flow of drive control and light emission control. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of a control signal and a drive signal. It is a figure which shows the other example of the timing chart of a control signal and a drive signal. It is a figure which shows the further another example of the timing chart of a control signal and a drive signal. It is an image figure of the output waveform of a control signal. It is a figure which shows the modification of connection of conversion ICs. It is a figure of the circuit structural example of a 2nd lamp drive part and a 2nd lamp part. It is a figure for demonstrating phase separation of the drive signal which serial parallel conversion outputs. It is a figure of the example of a circuit structure of a gift drive part and a drive mechanism. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows a presentation pattern table at the time of holding selection. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of the display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. It is a figure which shows a change production pattern table. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display when a character icon is displayed as a pending | holding display in an effect display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display of the active display after displaying a character icon as a pending | holding display in an effect display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows icon production setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect which chooses execution timing of a display mode change production under suspension display from a plurality of timings. It is a display screen figure of an effects display apparatus when battle reach effects are performed. It is a display screen figure of a presentation display apparatus when story reach presentation is performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production and movable body production in the specific super reach production.

  Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 4) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 4) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 121 4) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 4) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 4) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect design is performed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story property may be executed, and an effect such as displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern may be performed. For example, a battle wrestling, a soccer game, and a battle game in which an enemy ally character fights are performed, and if it is a big hit, a game or battle is won, and if it is out, a game or battle is defeated. It is also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be performed such that a predetermined story such as a story is sequentially developed.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, it is displayed in a display color (a display color different from the disappointing color) that evokes a big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Ru. For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of place but in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be made different according to the type of the big hit (whether it is a definite variation big hit or a normal big hit). In addition, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win the game ball to the big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hit with different number of rounds, the big hit The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. In addition, even if the number of rounds for each big hit is the same, for example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example 1 second), the big hitting which can not expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially And, when the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially, it is substantially to the big winning opening The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball can be expected. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that can be expected as a big hit that can be expected to be a game ball to the big winning opening by the difference in the number of opening of the big winning opening per round The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the mouth.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, it is displayed in a display color (a display color different from the disappointing color) that evokes a big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Ru. For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of place but in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be made different according to the type of the big hit (whether it is a definite variation big hit or a normal big hit). In addition, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win the game ball to the big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hit with different number of rounds, the big hit The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. In addition, even if the number of rounds for each big hit is the same, for example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example 1 second), the big hitting which can not expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially And, when the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially, it is substantially to the big winning opening The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball can be expected. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that can be expected as a big hit that can be expected to be a game ball to the big winning opening by the difference in the number of opening of the big winning opening per round The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the mouth.

  The display color when the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is turned off is a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display image from being disintegrated with the background image when the light is turned off. It is desirable to have.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol", and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be referred to as "special symbol indicator (variable display unit Sometimes referred to as ")".

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as "starting winning opening" or "starting opening".

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 18c for displaying the first hold storage count and a second hold storage display unit 18d for displaying the second hold storage count are provided. ing. In addition, an area (summed pending storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total pending memory number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning prize ball device 20 is provided with an open / close plate and specified when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. It is controlled to the gaming state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result. For example, in this embodiment, there is a jackpot symbol. The specific game state is to change the variable winning means capable of changing to the first state advantageous to the player and the second state disadvantageous to the player to the first state, and in this embodiment, the open state and the closed state. There is a big hit game state which makes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 which can be changed to the state open. For example, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, the jackpot game state is controlled as the specific gaming state. In each specific gaming state, the open / close version being in the closed state is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning combination 50 is provided on the right of the variable winning ball device 15. FIG. 2 is an explanatory view for explaining the winning combination 50. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, an opening 50a to which game balls can enter is provided at the top of the winning combination 50, and a normal winning gate 33 is provided at the opening 50a. The game ball having passed through the normal winning gate 33 is detected by the winning gate switch 33a. In this embodiment, when the gaming ball passes the normal winning gate 33 and is detected by the winning gate switch 33a, three winning balls are paid out.

  A variable ball entry device 22 is provided below the normal winning gate 33 in the winning combination 50. The variable ball entry device 22 includes an opening / closing member 24 which can slide in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1, and the opening / closing member 24 slides backward (back side) when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1 by the solenoid 17. By operating, the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to the open state, and the game ball can enter the variable ball entry device 22. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable ball entry device 22 can be controlled to the open state in a manner similar to the special variable winning ball device 20. In addition, both the variable ball entering device 22 and the special variable winning prize ball device 20 are controlled in the open state by the opening operation of the opening and closing plate, or both are controlled in the opening state by the slide operation, so that the same operation is performed. It may be configured to be controllable to the state.

  Moreover, the ball entry LED 22a is provided in the variable ball entry device 22. In this embodiment, when the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, the ball entry LED 22a is turned on to make the variable entry ball. It is made easy to recognize that the device 22 is controlled to the open state. In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, when the variable ball entering device 22 is controlled to the open state, the variable ball entering device 22 is controlled to the open state on the display screen of the effect display device 9 Display an indication (for example, a character display indicating that the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to an open state, an arrow display indicating the variable ball entry device 22), or a predetermined effect sound from the speaker 27 , Etc., it may be easy to recognize that the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to the open state.

  FIG. 2A shows a state in which the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to be closed in the winning combination 50. As shown in FIG. 2 (A), when the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to be in the closed state, the gaming ball entering from the opening 50a of the winning combination 50 passes through the normal winning gate 33. The ball can not enter into the variable ball entry device 22. And since the opening / closing member 24 at the upper part of the variable ball entry device 22 is formed obliquely in a mode in which it is slightly lowered from the right to the left, the gaming ball dropped to the opening / closing member 24 at the upper part of the variable ball entry device As shown in FIG. 2A, the top of the opening / closing member 24 is guided leftward. A second out port 25 different from the first out port 26 described later is provided inside the left side of the winning combination 50, and as shown in FIG. The guided game balls are guided from the opening 25 a provided on the left side wall of the winning combination 50 to the second out port 25 and discharged into the gaming machine 1. The second out port 25 is provided in the inside of the winning combination 50 in an invisible manner when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1, and the opening 25a is provided on the side wall of the winning combination 50 and perpendicular to the front of the gaming machine 1. As it is difficult to see from the front direction as it is a direction, it is difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port 25.

  FIG. 2B shows a state in which the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled in the open state in the winning combination 50. As shown in FIG. 2B, when the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball entering from the opening 50a of the winning combination 50 passes through the normal winning gate 33. Furthermore, it is possible to enter into the variable entry device 22. The game ball having entered the variable ball entry device 22 is detected by the ball entry detection switch 19. However, in this embodiment, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry device 22 and is detected by the ball entry detection switch 19, as described later, the normal prize winning display is executed, and the payout of the prize ball is made. Will not take place.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the variable ball entry device 22 is also controlled to the open state at the same timing as the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is controlled to the open state during the big hit game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable ball entering device 22 may be opened and can enter the ball during the big hit game, and when the game ball enters the variable ball entering device 22, the normal winning prize display is displayed. In addition to the prize balls for the prize winning in the big prize mouth, it reports that the ordinary prize has occurred and the prize ball has been obtained (correctly, the ordinary prize is generated based on the passage of the ordinary prize gate 33) However, based on entering the ball into the variable ball entry device 22, notification is made as if a normal winning has occurred). Therefore, in this embodiment, when a big hit is being played, a person who performs a shooting operation aiming at the right side of the game area 7 performs a normal winning acquisition display in addition to the winning for the big winning opening. The player aims at the right side of the game area 7 to perform a shooting operation (a so-called right-handed operation).

  In this embodiment, since the winning balls themselves are not generated by entering the variable ball entry device 22 but are generated by passing the normal prize gate 33, the game area is not controlled during the big hit game If you aim at the right side of 7 and carry out the firing operation, the game ball passes the normal winning gate 33 and a certain winning ball will be obtained (because it does not enter the variable ball entry device 22, the normal winning There is no acquisition display, and it is only difficult for the player to recognize that a winning ball can be obtained). Therefore, for example, a sensor or the like is provided on the right side of the game area 7, and when it is detected that the right hitting operation is performed when not controlled during the big hit game, a warning display is performed or a left hitting operation is suggested. It is desirable that the player be prompted to perform a left-handed operation by giving a left-handed notification.

  As described with reference to FIG. 2 (in particular, FIG. 2A), in this embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 but does not enter the variable winning ball device 22 The game ball is discharged from the second out port 25 disposed in the vicinity of the variable ball entry device 22, and it is difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged. By configuring in this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as being lost. Specifically, for example, a game ball that has passed through the normal winning gate 33 but has not entered the variable winning ball device 22 drops downward as it is and is discharged from the normal first out port 26. If the end has been reached, the path to the first out port 26 is also long, and the first out port 26 is provided with an opening so as to be easily visible when viewed from the front, so the game ball does not enter The player recognizes that the ink has been discharged. However, since three winning balls have already been paid out because the game ball has already passed through the normal winning gate 33, no loss has actually occurred to the player. Therefore, if it is recognized that the game ball which has passed through the normal winning gate 33 is discharged from the out port as described above, the number of game balls discharged from the normal first out port 26 can be seen large As a result, the player may be misunderstood as losing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball which has passed through the normal winning gate 33 but has not entered the variable winning ball device 22 is discharged by the second out port 25 which is difficult to visually recognize. It is possible to prevent confusion with the gaming ball discharged from the normal first out port 26, and to suppress misunderstanding that the player is lost as such.

  In addition, the aspect of the 2nd out port 25 is not restricted to what was shown by this embodiment. If it is a position close to the variable ball entry device 22 as compared with the first out port 26, for example, a second out port is provided on the bottom of the winning combination 50 below the variable ball entry device 22, The gaming ball may be discharged from the second out port provided on the bottom surface portion of the 50. Even with such a configuration, if the second out port is provided on the bottom of the winning combination 50, the direction is perpendicular to the front of the gaming machine 1 and it is difficult to see from the front direction. It can be made difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged.

  In addition, for example, by providing a decorative member in front of the second out port to make it difficult to see the second out port, it may be difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port. . In addition, for example, the size of the opening of the second out port may be made smaller than that of the first out port to make it difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port. . As such, the second out port may be configured in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the second out port compared to the first out port in some form.

  In addition, the discharge path for discharging the game ball entered into the variable ball entry device 22 to the back side of the board of the game board 6 and the game ball entered into the second out port 25 to the back side of the board of the game board 6 The discharge path for the game may be connected on the back side of the board of the gaming board 6 to be shared or may be provided as a separate and independent discharge path.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) In this case, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be hit symbols is increased, and there may be a transition to a high base state in which the opening time and opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is a first out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start winning (that is, the special symbol indicator 8a, 8b or It shifts to the high base state which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display in effect display device 9 are easily satisfied). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a short time state (special symbol time short state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings as the frequency at which the variation of the effect pattern starts is increased (in other words, the reserve memory is quickly stored). Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 3 also shows the control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, the main board 31 is also the input driver circuit 58 that provides the game control microcomputer 560 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a. Mounted on the. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  In addition, the display control means mounted on the effect control board 80 displays the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and the ball entrance LED 22 a provided on the variable ball entry device 22. While performing control, control of the sound output from the speaker 27 via the audio | voice output board | substrate 70 is performed.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. Although the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70 in the example shown in FIG. 4, a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 107. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 107, a detection signal from the ball entry detection switch 19 indicating that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry device 22. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the solenoid 17 via the output port 105 to control the variable ball entry device 22 in the open state.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the detection signal from the ball entry detection switch 19 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the game control microcomputer 560 is not limited. It may be configured to input to In this case, when the game control microcomputer 560 inputs a detection signal from the ball entry detection switch 19, a command indicating that the detection signal from the ball entry detection switch 19 is input is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. The transmission may be performed, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may be controlled to display an ordinary winning acquisition display described later based on the reception of the command.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the entrance LED 22 a based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern). Further, when the voice synthesis IC 703 receives a predetermined request from the effect control board 80, the voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice and outputs the voice to the speaker 27.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to power supply to the game machine being started and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes security check processing, which is processing for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not. , The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode of the maskable interrupt is set (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of microcomputer 560 for gaming control and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode that indicates the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter on the stack.

  Next, setting (initialization) of the built-in device register is performed (step S5). By the process of step S5, settings (initialization) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are performed.

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and shifts to a clear signal check process.

  Note that software delay processing may be executed to delay the start timing of the gaming apparatus control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software. Such software delay processing can delay the start timing of the game control processing as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not performed. When delay processing is performed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board can not receive the command transmitted by the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37) Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the clear switch is turned on (step S7). The CPU 56 may check the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may check the state of the clear signal multiple times. For example, when it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed after delaying a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds). If it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. At this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after setting a delay time of a predetermined time. Here, the number of reconfirmation is not limited to one or two, and may be three or more. Alternatively, the check may be made twice, and when the check results do not match, it may be confirmed again.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not the data protection process (for example, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It confirms (step S8). In this embodiment, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed when the power supply is stopped. If it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of the power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes the initialization processing.

  Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed is a value corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop processing (for example, 2). It is confirmed by whether it is). Note that such a confirmation method is an example, for example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop processing has been performed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop processing has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping the power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. In addition, the number of times of checksum calculation corresponding to the number of data to be checked is set. Then, an exclusive OR operation is performed on the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer. While storing the operation result in the checksum data area, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 and the value of the checksum calculation number is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area, and uses the data after the inversion as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop processing, the checksum is calculated by the same processing as the above processing, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process (steps S10 to S14) to be executed at the time of power on not at the time of recovery from the power supply stop. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs gaming state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of the power supply stop. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer), not yet It is a portion where data indicating the payout prize number of balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the top address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a buffer for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize symbol flag, a ball breakage flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state The initial value is set to the flag for performing.

  The CPU 56 sets the start address of the command transmission table for initialization stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board A process is performed (step S14). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the setting of the timer interrupt is completed, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt disable state (step S17), executes the initial value random number updating process (step S18a) and the display random number updating process (step S18b). The interrupt permission state is set again (step S19). That is, when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 is in the interrupt prohibition state, and when the execution of the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process is completed Make it

  The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determination to determine the type of the big hit (for example, the big hit symbol determination random number for determining the special symbol that generates the big hit, and whether to shift the gaming state to a definite variation state Initial value of count value such as random number for probability variation decision to be used, counter for generating normal pattern hit judgment random number to decide whether to generate hit based on normal pattern etc. It is a random number to determine the value. Game control processing (processing for controlling the gaming devices such as the effect display device 9, the variable winning ball device 15, the ball payout device 97 and the like provided to the gaming machine by the gaming control microcomputer) In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer (also referred to as gaming device control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one revolution, an initial value is set to the counter.

  Further, the display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a variation pattern determination random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, and a reach determination random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated. Used. The display random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  Further, it is also executed in the timer interrupt process that the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are described later (that is, the timer is in an interrupt-prohibited state when the display random number update process is executed). Since the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process, the conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process is avoided. That is, if the timer interruption occurs during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interruption processing, the count is counted. The continuity of the values may be lost. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Specifically, during the execution of the main processing, when a timer interrupt occurs during a period in which the interrupt processing is permitted during the execution of the loop processing of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 Execute timer interrupt processing which is started in response to the occurrence of timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 receives detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a via the switch circuit 58. The input of the switch is detected (switching process: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is the on state, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18, and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 (step S22). With regard to the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning notification process for detecting an occurrence of an abnormal winning on the special winning opening and notifying an abnormality (step S24).

  After step S24, the CPU 56 performs processing to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25 ). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is selected and executed in accordance with the special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. And, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each processing according to the gaming state. Also, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting, to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, an effect control command regarding an effect pattern synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol command control process: step S30). In addition, that the fluctuation of a production | presentation pattern synchronizes with the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol means that the fluctuation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process to output data such as a starting opening signal supplied to a hole management computer, 1 signal of symbol determination number, 2 signals of symbol determination number, 1 to 3 signals of big hit, and a short time signal etc. (Step S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a (step S32). ). Specifically, it is mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on, a payout control command in which one is set as the number of prize balls is output and the payout control command is received. The payout control microcomputer pays out one winning ball. Further, when the count switch 23 is turned on, a payout control command in which 15 pieces are set as the number of prize balls is output, and the payout control microcomputer having received the payout control command pays out 15 prize balls. It is something to put out. Further, when the winning gate switch 33a is turned on, a payout control command in which three are set as the number of winning balls is output, and the payout control microcomputer having received the payout control command outputs three winning balls. It is something to pay out.

  In this mode, one round is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses, or when a winning of 10 game balls to a big winning opening is detected (that is, large Since the winning opening is closed) and, as described above, 15 winning balls are paid out when the gaming ball has won the big winning opening, 150 winning balls in one round are obtained. It is possible to pay out the That is, if it is a 15R probability variation big hit, it is possible to pay out 2250 prize balls, and if it is an 8R probability variation big hit, it is possible to pay out 1200 prize balls.

  In addition, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents regarding the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port (Step S34: output processing). Then, the CPU 56 executes a storage process of checking whether the number of pending storages increases or decreases (step S35).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S36). Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status indicator display process of setting status display control data for displaying each status indicator in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability change state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator light indicating that the state is a high probability state is set in the output buffer You may do it.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S39), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stop-displayed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is “non-reach”. The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-4 which is used in the case of non-reach and accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 used when not reaching is a fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation, and fluctuation time of the production design is shortened to a short time (in this example, 3.0 seconds) . Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, normal PA 2-3 to normal PA 2-4, normal PB 2-3 to normal Variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, and super PB3-3 to super PB3-4 are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in the case of using the normal PB 2-3 among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit described later) (for big hit type judgment)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a single variation pattern, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of specific effects such as pseudo-runs and slip effects.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 9A is the jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches with any of the big hit judgment value, it decides to make it a big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 9 (B) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (ie, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 9C shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the jackpot type determination table 131a, 131b will make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "15R probability variation big hit" based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, It is a table referred to in order to decide either of “8R probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9 (B) and 9 (C), 10 judgment values are assigned to “15R probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes 30 judgment values are assigned to the “15R probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131b while the 15R probability variation big hit is determined by the ratio of 10) (ratio of 30/40 The case where it is determined that the 15R probability variation is a big hit) will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 is started with a second special symbol, rather than when the first start winning opening 13 is subjected to a start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed. In the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the “15R probability variation big hit” is determined is higher.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, there are "15R positive variation big hit" and "8R positive variation big hit" as big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 8 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the big hit classification is two types of “15R positive variation big hit” and “8R positive variation big hit” is shown, it is not limited to two types, for example, three or more big hit categories are provided You may do so. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than two types, for example, only one type may be provided as the jackpot type.

  "15R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a positive change state and a short time state Is also migrated.). Then, the probability change state and the time saving state continue until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Hereinafter, the gaming state controlled to the definite variation state and the short time state may be referred to as "high probability high base state", and the state not controlled to any of the definite variation state and the short time state may be referred to as "low probability low base state" .

  "8R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls 8 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a positive change state and in a short time state Is also migrated.). Then, the probability change state and the time saving state continue until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

  In jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b, judgment values (big hit type judgment values) corresponding to “15R positive variation big hit” and “8R positive variation big hit” are set, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1. ing. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  10 and 11 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol variably displayed on the presentation display device 9 corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A 001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for specifying the start of the big hit game by displaying the fan fare screen.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round.

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game.

  The command A 401 (H) is an effect control command (big winning opening winning combination designation command) for designating that the gaming ball has won in the big winning opening.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, or the second start winning opening 14 If the second start opening switch 14a for turning on is turned on, that is, if the start winning combination to the first start winning opening 13 or the start winning combination to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing processing Execute (steps S311 and S312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start Doguchi switch 13a or the second start hole switch 14a has not been turned on, depending on the internal state, do any of the of the steps S300～S307.

  The process of steps S300 to S307 is the following process.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. The data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control process of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the round 1, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a processing for starting a big hit game.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming establishment of closing condition of the big winning opening, and the like are performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process of setting a flag (for example, a positive change flag) indicating the gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the on state, the process proceeds to step S1217. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, hardware R is a random R (big hit determination random number), a software random number is a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) are not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, (1) It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. For example, in the variation pattern setting process described later, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts the value from the variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), or the variation pattern The value may be directly extracted from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 14, in the first suspension storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first suspension storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S1217). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1218). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1219), and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1220). Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14) (step S1221). . In the process of step S1221, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S222).

  FIG.15 and FIG.16 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 or not (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage number buffer. Then, it is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and each storage area in the first pending storage number buffer Shift the content of When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "first", the CPU 56 is a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage number buffer of the RAM 55 Each random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if the probability change flag is not set.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the background designation command is transmitted each time for each change, but, for example, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed from the time of the previous change at the start of the change, Only when the state changes, a background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of times of transmission of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, the microcomputer for effect control is in the order of background designation command, fluctuation pattern command, display result designation command, and pending storage number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. It will be sent to 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage count subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1215 and S1221 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the big hit judgment. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes processing for comparing a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 9) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number and determining that a jackpot will occur if they match. That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal game state). Specifically, the probability variation time big hit determination table (the table in the ROM 54 to which the right side of FIG. 9A is set) in which the number of big hit determination values is set large in advance, and the number of big hit determination values A normal-time jackpot judgment table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When in the gaming state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at normal times. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S62. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped It is reset at the timing to finish or the variation display of 50 special symbols.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S66 as it is.

  In step S62, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used for determining the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S63). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9B. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9C.

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“15R probability variation big hit”, “15 R probability variation big hit,” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. The 8R probability variation big hit ") is determined as the type of big hit (step S64). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1215 or S1221 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer to determine the big hit type. .

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S65). For example, if the big hit type is "15R certainty big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and if the big hit type is "8R certainty big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type Be done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S66). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, the symbol "-" which is an out symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, either of the big hit symbols is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, "7" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be "15R probability variation big hit", and "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is decided to be "8R probability variation big hit".

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S67).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types according to the jackpot type. Is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S98.

  If the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the positive change flag indicating the positive change state is set (step S93). The definite change flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the definite change state, and is reset when the definite change state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped It is reset at the timing when or 50 times of variable display ends. If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S93), the CPU 56 uses the probability variation change pattern type determination table for probability change as a table used to determine the change pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. It chooses (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S98.

  If the probability change flag is not set (N in step S93), the CPU 56 confirms whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S94). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S94), the CPU 56 uses the normal fluctuation pattern classification determination table as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. Is selected (step S95). Then, the process proceeds to step S98.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S94), the CPU 56 is a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types, and it is A variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S96). Then, the process proceeds to step S98.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S93 to S96, the variation pattern type determination table for loss time variation shortening is selected. When the gaming state is a definite change state, a change pattern type determination table for positive change is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S98 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the change is performed in step S99. As the pattern, non-reach PA-1 of shortening variation is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed.

  Although in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of pending storages are different tables, the shortening is described. A common table may be used as the fluctuation pattern type determination table for fluctuation.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is a definite change state, when the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation is performed You may not do this. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “Y” in step S 93, it confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S83, S97, S95 or S96. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S98). In addition, when it is configured not to extract random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 performs the variation pattern type determination for generating the random pattern type determination random number (random 2). The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S98, as a table used to determine the variation pattern determination table. One of them is selected (step S99). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S99. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S100). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the microcomputer for effect control 100 (step S101). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S103). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S104).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S93 to S96 and S98 may be executed to determine the fluctuation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 controls the transmission of one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation effect control command (see FIG. 10) in accordance with the determined type and removal of the big hit. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S105). If not set, the process proceeds to step S109. When the big hit flag is set, when the type of big hit is “15R certainty big hit”, control to transmit the display result 2 designated command is performed (steps S106 and S107). In addition, it is specifically judged by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is "01" or not whether it is "15 R probability variation big hit" or not. it can. Further, when the type of the big hit is “8R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S106 and S108). In addition, it is specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "8R probability variation big hit" or not. it can.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S105), that is, when the big hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a display result 1 designation command (step S109).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S110).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 56 resets the positive change flag indicating that it is a positive change state (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a value (for example, 5.0 seconds) corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit is generated on the effect display device 9) in the time measurement timer (step S134) . In addition, the CPU 56 sets the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type (for example, “15” for “15R probability variation big hit”, “8” for “8R probability variation big hit”) to the round number counter (“8”). Step S135). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S305) (step S136).

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability change flag is set (step S137), and if not set, that is, in the normal state, the step Transfer to S141. If the probability variation flag is set, that is, if it is a probability variation state, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S138), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0 (step S139) . If not 0, the process proceeds to step S141. If it becomes 0, the probability change flag is reset (step S140), and the process proceeds to step S141. As a result, transition from the positive change state to the normal state is performed when the change is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In step S141, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S141).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening open pre-processing (step S305) in the special symbol process processing. In the special winning opening open processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time measurement timer by 1 (step S1401). In addition, when it is before the start of round 1, the processing of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the time measurement timer set in step S134 of the special symbol stop process is measured, whereby the start of round 1 is started. The previous big hit display time (fanfare period) will be measured. In the case of round 1 or later, each round is performed by executing the process of step S1401 to measure the value of the time measurement timer set in step S1469 of the special winning opening open process described later. A later (except after the final round) interval period will be measured.

  In this embodiment, the big hit display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the big hit display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separately set. The timer may be used to measure time.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input (step S1403). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when the gaming ball having won the special winning opening is detected (Y in step S1403), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the special winning opening winning specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1404). Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  When the time measurement timer times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds to the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command and causes the microcomputer 100 for effect control to be performed. Control to transmit is performed (step S1412).

  Next, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball at the special winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening to an open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning prize ball device 20.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the big hit type and the round to be started to the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step S1415). In this mode, the open time of the big winning opening in all rounds is 29.5 seconds in any type of big hit, so in step S1415, the CPU 56 corresponds to 29.5 seconds in the open time timer. Set the value to

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening open process (step S306) (step S1416).

  FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special winning opening open process (step S306) in the special symbol process process. In the special winning opening open process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 is input (step S1452). If the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, if a game ball winning a prize in the special winning opening is detected (Y in step S1452), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1453). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the special winning opening winning combination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1454). Then, the process proceeds to step S1462.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the winning number counter is 10 or not (step S1462). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step S1465. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the number of winnings to the big winning opening reaches 10, even before the opening period (for example, 29.5 seconds) of the big winning opening has elapsed, step S1462 Is determined as Y, and the process proceeds to step S1465, where the big winning opening may be controlled to be closed and the round may be ended.

  If the value of the winning number counter is less than 10 (N in step S1462), the CPU 56 subtracts one from the open time timer (step S1463), and confirms whether the open time timer has timed out (step S1464). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends. If the open time timer has timed out, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening in the closed state (step S1465). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped to close the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning prize ball device 20. Further, the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds to EXT data, and performs control to transmit a designated command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1466).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step S1467), and confirms whether the value of the round number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1468). When the value of the round number counter is 0 (that is, all rounds in the big hit game (round 15 in the case of 15R probability big hit, round 8 in the case of 8 R positive fat hit)) In step S1471, the CPU 56 sets a value (2.0 seconds in this example) corresponding to a period during which the interval effect is performed after the final round in the time measurement timer (step S1471). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S1472).

  If the value of the round number counter is not 0 (that is, if there are still remaining rounds), the CPU 56 corresponds to an interval period (corresponding to a period for performing interval presentation other than after the last round) to the time measurement timer A value (in this example, 0.1 seconds) is set (step S1469). Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S1470).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S168. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the time measurement timer (step S161).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input (step S162). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when the gaming ball that has won the special winning opening is detected (Y in step S162), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S163). Then, the process proceeds to step S164.

  By executing the processing of steps S162 to S163, even if it is an interval period after the end of the final round period of the big hit game, a winning to the big winning opening is detected and a big winning opening winning designation command is transmitted. It is possible.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time measurement timer after subtraction has become 0 (step S164). If the value of the time measurement timer is 0 (i.e., if the interval period after the last round has passed), the CPU 56 resets the big hit flag (step S165), and transmits the big hit end designation command. (Step S166). Then, the CPU 56 is a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) in the big hit end display timer (for example, it corresponds to 3.0 seconds Value) is set (step S167), and the process ends.

  In step S168, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S168). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S169). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S169), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag and shifts to a probability change state (step S173). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probability variation number counter (step S174).

  Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S176).

  FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of a program for the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol variation processing is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203) ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the setting of the start flag, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the effect control command received, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step) S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  After step S706, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 10 and 11) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  FIGS. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 10 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received normally.

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (step S621), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this embodiment, the big hit start designated command reception flag set in step S622 is also referred to as a fanfare flag.

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control sets a big hit end designated command reception flag (step S624). In this embodiment, the big hit end designated command reception flag set in step S624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening open designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 generates the special winning opening open designation command received in the RAM. It stores in the storage area (step S626). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a big winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received (step S627).

  If the received effect control command is the designated command after opening the big winning opening (step S 628), the CPU 101 for effect control receives the designated command after the opening of the special winning opening, and the designated command after opening the big winning opening is formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area (step S629). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a flag after opening the special winning opening indicating that the designated command after opening the special winning opening has been received (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that the gaming ball has won the special winning opening (step S632). .

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S 679), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background screen according to the normal state (for example, blue display color) It changes to background screen) (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a definite variation state background designation command (step S 682), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen (for example, a red display) according to the certain variation state for the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 It changes to the background screen of a color (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is a wait for customer demonstration specification command (step S685), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a wait for customer demonstration screen on the effect display device 30 after 30 seconds (step S687). . Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 9. When a fluctuation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and measurement is ended. After step S687, the number of pending storages stored in each pending storage number saving area is cleared (step S688).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S691). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the big hit display process (step S804) or the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): If it is a big hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the effect display device 9 after the fluctuation time ends. For example, when a fanfare designation command specifying start of a big hit is received, fanfare production is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is being opened is received, display control or the like of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. For example, upon receiving a display command after the opening of the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is opened (closed), interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. For example, when an ending specification command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (the change pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern which designates the pseudo run, when the pseudo run is specified with the fluctuation pattern command, CPU101 for production control CPU, in step S8002, as the temporary stop design of the pseudo run the chance eye design ( For example, a combination of a jackpot symbol and a symbol whose one symbol deviates, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach, is also determined. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 31, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 3 designation) In the case of a command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are aligned with the same symbol as a stop symbol. That is, based on the stop symbol, the player can not recognize which big hit it will be.

  Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the exfoliation is called "the exfoliation design".

  Then, the CPU for effect control 101 executes an advance notice effect setting process for setting an advance notice effect (step S8003). Here, for example, whether or not the variation to be started is a big hit or not, if it is a big hit, which big hit type, or based on the read variation pattern etc., a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, the reliability for the big hit) The presence or absence of the execution of the step-up notice that develops up to the stage corresponding to the button effect, etc. when the effect screen is switched by accepting the operation on the operation member from the player is determined.

  After step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the notice effect when the fluctuation pattern and the notice effect are to be executed (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. showing the mode of each fluctuation constituting the fluctuation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the production symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the production symbol) It includes the effect mode other than the effect pattern on the screen. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the rendering time in the rendering mode is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and displays the effect pattern in the mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer setting value and the character image or background displayed on the display screen Control to display. In addition, it controls the blinking of the light emitter in the mode set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and controls the sound output from the speaker 27.

  The process table shown in FIG. 32 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and the notice effect and the notice effect. If it is determined to execute the notice effect in the process of step S8004 or the like, the process table in which data corresponding to the notice effect is set is selected, and it is not determined to execute the notice effect. In the case, a process table is selected in which data corresponding to the preview effect is not set.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  After step S8005, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, LED and character) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (step S8006).

  After step S8006, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S861). Then, if the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as described later, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set at step S861 is a step at which the big hit symbol has been displayed but the fanfare effect has not been executed yet, so the processing to display the stop symbol of the effect symbol at step S862 The processing moves to step S867 without repeatedly executing.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disappeared symbol or big hit symbol) (step S862). The effect control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the effect pattern in response to the reception of the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the big hit symbol is displayed in step S862 (Y in step S863), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S866), and the fanfare flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) is set. Whether or not it is not confirmed (step S867). When the fan fare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868) and executes the award ball notification start process for starting the award ball notification effect (Step S868A).

  "Prize ball notification effect" indicates the "prize ball notification" that displays the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out during the fanfare period and the value corresponding to the prize ball notification, and the game ball wins a prize winning opening This is an effect including "state display" which is displayed by subtracting only the number of prize balls to be paid out each time the game is performed. For example, in this mode, since the number of prize balls to be paid out when the gaming ball has won the big prize hole is "15", it indicates that 2250 prize balls are scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball notification. When "2250 GET" is displayed, the state display is displayed by switching to "2235", "2220", "2205", and so on each time one game ball is won.

  In this form, when it is a 15R probability variation big hit, as a notification pattern in the award ball notification effect, a pattern for displaying "2250 GET" as a award ball notification and displaying a state, and "1200 GET" as a award ball notification are displayed. At the same time, a status display is performed, and a pattern for notifying "1050 GET" and an additional notification in round 9 is provided. Further, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, only a pattern for displaying "1200 GET" as the prize ball notification is provided as the notification pattern in the prize ball notification effect.

  Moreover, in this form, the button effect can be performed in the fanfare period. The button effect is an effect capable of switching the value displayed as the award ball notification when the player is urged to operate the push button 120 and the operation to the push button 120 is received during a predetermined effective period. . Concretely, it is a 15R probability variation big hit, "1200 GET" is displayed as a prize ball notification, and when the operation to the push button 120 is accepted in the button effect, the value of the prize ball notification is changed from "1200" to "2250" It is switchable. In addition, even if it is 8R probability variation big hit, button production may be executed, but even if it is the case where operation to push button 120 is accepted during the effective period, value of announcement ball notification does not change . The number of button effects that can be performed is not limited to one, and multiple button effects can be performed during a fanfare period or during a big hit game (that is, a value to be displayed as the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out may be displayed several times) (May be switchable).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type has been made by executing the same effect in the case of the 15R certainty variation big hit and the case of the 8R certainty variation big deal. Sometimes. In that case, in round 8, a promotion effect (for example, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight against each other) is performed, and a successful hit (for example, an ally character wins the enemy character) While notifying that the big hit ends in the round 8 by failing (for example, the teammate character loses to the enemy character). Hereinafter, there are cases where the successful promotion effect that succeeds is referred to as "promotion successful effect production", and the failed promotion effect is referred to as "promotion failure effect production". That is, in the case of the 15R certainty variation hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which big hit type until the round 7 and to execute the promotion success effect in the round 8. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R probability variation hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which big hit type until the round 7 and to execute the promotion failure effect in the round 8.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S869). Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S 870), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (the rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and the speaker 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1) (step S870A). Thereafter, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S871).

  Further, when the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S863 (ie, when disclosing symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process processing or the fourth symbol process processing (for example, when the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is confirmed, the fluctuation pattern command is immediately performed) The reception flag may be reset).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a winning ball notification start process. In the award ball notification start process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a notification pattern determination lottery for determining a notification pattern in the award ball notification effect (step S3301). Specifically, the notification pattern in the award ball notification effect is determined using the notification pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view of a notification pattern determination lottery table. Although determination values corresponding to the notification patterns are assigned to each notification pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 35, in the example shown in FIG. 35, in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the determination values assigned is shown. It is done. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for notification pattern determination lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  In the notification pattern, the pattern name (Pt1 to Pt6), the display mode of the prize ball surrounding in the fanfare period (fanfare display), the presence or absence of the button effect ("O" executes, "X" does not execute) , And promotion effects (in the case of “success”, the promotion success effect is executed, and in the case of “failure”, the promotion failure effect is executed). In addition, as a fanfare display in the alerting | reporting pattern which performs a button effect, the alerting | reporting aspect before and behind a button effect is shown. For example, in the case of Pt2, “1200” is displayed before the button effect is performed, and it is shown that switching to “2250” is performed after the button effect is performed. For example, in the case of Pt4 and Pt6, "1200" is displayed before button effect execution, and "1200" is displayed after button effect execution (that is, when an operation on push button 120 is accepted in button effect) Even if it does not change the value of the prize ball notification).

  Note that Pt1 to Pt4 are notification patterns selected when the big hit type is 15R certainty variation big hit. Pt5 and Pt6 are notification patterns selected when the jackpot type is 8R probability variation jackpot.

  Specifically, Pt1 is a notification pattern for notifying that the 15R probability variation has become a big hit by displaying "2250 GET" as the award ball notification. Pt2 is a notification pattern for notifying that the 15R probability variation big hit has been made by switching and displaying the prize ball notification after the button effect to "2250 GET". Pt3 indicates that it is likely to be a big hit in the 8R by showing "1200 GET" as a prize ball notification without performing a button effect, and then it indicates that it has become a big hit in the 15R positive variation by performing a promotion successful production Notification pattern. Pt3 indicates that the award ball notification has not switched from "1200 GET" even if the button effect is given, and suggests that it may be an 8R probability variation big hit, and then announce that it is a 15R probability variation big hit by performing promotion success production Notification pattern. Pt5 indicates that it may be an 8R probability variation hit by performing promotion failure effect after indicating the possibility that it is an 8R probability variation hit by displaying "1200 GET" as a prize ball notification without performing a button effect Notification pattern. Pt6 indicates that even if the button effect is performed, the ball notification does not switch from "1200 GET" to indicate that it may be an 8R probability variation big hit, and then it is notified that the 8R probability variation has become a big hit by performing promotion failure representation Notification pattern.

    FIG. 35 (a) is an explanatory view showing a first notification pattern determination lottery table used when it is a 15R probability variation big hit. For example, in the case of a 15R probability variation hit, the notification pattern is determined at a ratio of 40% of Pt1, 30% of Pt2, a ratio of 20% of Pt3, and a ratio of 10% of Pt4. .

    FIG. 35 (b) is an explanatory view showing a second notification pattern determination lottery table used in the case of 8R probability variation big hit. For example, in the case of an 8R probability variation big hit, Pt5 is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt6 at a rate of 70% as a notification pattern.

  As described above, by configuring Pt3 to be difficult to be selected in the 15R certainty variation big hit, when the value of the award ball notification in the fanfare period is "1200" without the button display being performed, the 15R certain variation big hit It has a low reliability.

  In addition, it is difficult to select Pt4 when it is 15R certainty variation big hit, and Pt6 is hard to be selected when it is 8R certainty variation big hit, even if the button display is performed, the value of the prize ball notification in the fanfare period In the case of “1200”, the reliability against the 15R probability variation big hit is low.

  After step S3301, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not the determined notification pattern is Pt1 (step S3302). If it is Pt1, "2250" is set to the number S of notified notification balls (step S3302) In step S3303), the process proceeds to step S3304A. The award ball notification number S is a value displayed as the remaining award number of balls scheduled to be paid out (that is, a value displayed in the award ball notification and the status display). If it is any one of Pt2 to Pt6 in step S3302, the effect control CPU 101 sets "1200" to the number of notified notification balls S (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3304A.

In step S3304A, the effect control CPU 101 executes award ball notification based on the number S of award ball notifications (step S3304A). Specifically, a display such as "2250 GET" is performed when the number of notified balls S is "2250", and a display such as "1200 GET" is performed when the number of notified balls S is "1200". In addition, when the number of notified informing balls S is the maximum value ("2250" in this form), a display not including a specific value (for example, "MAX
"Display" such as "GET" may be performed.

  In this embodiment, even if the effective period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 120 in the button effect, the display of the notification of the award ball can be switched, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If the operation on the push button 120 is not detected until the end of the valid period, the display of the award ball notification may not be switched.

  After that, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the determined notification pattern is any of Pt2, Pt4 and Pt6 (step S3305), and if it is not any of Pt2, Pt4 and Pt6, the prize ball is notified as it is End the start process. If it is any of Pt2, Pt4 and Pt6, an effective period flag indicating that it is an effective period of the operation on the push button 120 is set (step S3306), and an operation instruction notification prompting the operation on the push button 120 is started Then (step S3307), the winning ball notification start process is ended. As the operation instruction notification, in this embodiment, an image indicating that the operation of the push button 120 is prompted is displayed on the effect display device 9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 27. Alternatively, the light emitting member incorporated in the push button 120 may emit light. Further, in this embodiment, although the effective period of the button effect is started from the start of the fanfare period, the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the fanfare period is started and a predetermined period has elapsed, Even if the fanfare period is started (for example, during fluctuation) or at the timing when the round 1 is started, a valid period is provided from the predetermined timing after the round 1 is started You may do it.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, first, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening opening display command has been received is set (that is, the big winning opening at the start of round 1) Whether or not an open display command has been received is confirmed (step S1901). If the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the valid period flag is set (step S3501), and if not set, It transfers to step S1902.

  When the valid period flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation to the push button 120 (Y in step S3502) or the valid period end timing (for example, 3.0 after the fanfare period is started) Second, specifically, when the valid period flag is set, the timer is set to a value corresponding to 3.0 seconds, and when the timer times out, it is determined that the valid period end timing has come. In the case (N in step S3502, Y in S3503), the validity period flag is reset (step S3504), and it is determined whether the notification pattern is Pt2 (step S3505). If it is not Pt2, it will transfer to step S1902. If it is Pt2, "2250" is set to the number of notified informing balls S (step S3506), and informing balls in accordance with the number of informing balls S are executed (step S3507). Specifically, a display such as “2250 GET” or a display not including a specific value (for example, a display such as “MAX GET”) is performed. As a result, the display of the award ball notification is switched from "1200 GET" to "2250 GET".

  As described above, in this embodiment, although the button effect can be executed in the big hit display process, the button effect may be executed in the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  In step S1902, the CPU for effect control 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, frame LED 28, etc.) according to the contents of process data n (step S1902) Step S1903). The process data n is data in the fanfare effect process table selected in step S869, and is data switched in step S1905 each time the process timer times out.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S1905). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), that is, if it is the start timing of round 1, the effect control CPU 101 ends the award ball notification and the award ball notification State display based on the number S is started (step S1907A). Specifically, the state display is performed by displaying the value of the number of ball announcements S on the lower right of the effect display device 9. Since the number of notified balls S is a value that changes based on the occurrence of a winning on the big winning opening, the state display is also changed based on the number of notified balls S. After that, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag for the special winning opening open (step S1907).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the effect during the round (step S1908). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer (step S1909), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effect component) Control of the effect display device 9, various lamps as effect components, and the speakers 27) as effect components is executed (step S1910).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 initializes a winning counter for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening (step S1911). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to 0.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 drives the solenoid 17 to control the variable ball entry device 22 in the open state (step S1912). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to start lighting of the ball entry LED 22a (step S1913).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S 805) (step S 1914).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an in-round process (step S805) in the effect control process. In the middle round processing, the CPU for effect control 101 first confirms whether or not the after special winning opening open flag indicating that the after special winning opening opening designation command has been received is set (step S2901). If the flag after opening the special winning opening is not set (N in step S2901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S2902), and the effect device (effect display according to the contents of the process data n Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28 and the like is executed (step S2903).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step S2904), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S2905). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S2906).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S2907). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning to the special winning opening occurs and the special winning opening winning designation command has been received), the CPU 101 for effect control controls the special winning opening winning flag. It resets (step S2908). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S2909). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts “15” from the number of notified prize balls S (step S2910), and changes the state display based on the number of notified prize balls S (step S2910A). Specifically, the value displayed as the status display is updated to the value of the number S of prize ball notification numbers after the subtraction.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of notified prize balls S is “0” (step S2911), and if not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2913. If it is "0", a special effect of outputting a specific sound from the speaker 27 is executed (step S2912). Thereby, the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and the interest can be improved. Further, by executing the effect by sound as the special effect, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case of executing the effect by display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball entry detection switch 19 is turned on (step S2913). If the ball entry detection switch 19 is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display the normal winning acquisition display on the effect display device 9 (step S2914). For example, a display such as “+3” is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a display is displayed to notify that three prize balls have been obtained by the passage of the game balls of the normal winning gate 33.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 37, the process is simplified and described, but more specifically, as a process of displaying the normal winning a prize display of step S2914, ON of the ball entry detection switch 19 is detected once. Based on the above, for example, control is performed to display a normal winning a prize display for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, when it is detected that the ball entry detection switch 19 is turned on, the effect display 9 starts displaying the normal prize winning display and sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) in a predetermined timer. Then, when the predetermined timer has timed out, it is controlled to erase the normal winning a prize display on the effect display device).

  When the flag after opening the special winning opening is set in step S2901 (Y in step S2901), the CPU 101 for effect control resets the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S2920).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the interval effect (step S2921). Then, the CPU for effect control 101 starts the process timer (step S2922), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effect component) Control of the effect display device 9, various lamps as effect components, and the speakers 27) as effect components is executed (step S2923).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stops the drive of the solenoid 17 to control the variable ball entry device 22 in the closed state (step S2924). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to end the lighting of the ball entrance LED 22a (step S2925).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806) (step S2926).

  FIG. 38 to FIG. 40 are flowcharts showing round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the big hit end designated command reception flag is set (step S3901). If the big hit end designated command reception flag is not set (N in step S3901), whether the special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designated command has been received is set Whether or not it is confirmed (step S3902). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S3902), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S3903), and the effect device (effect display according to the contents of the process data n The control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc. is executed (step S3904).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S3905). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S3906). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S3907).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S3917). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning to the special winning opening occurs and the special winning opening winning designation command has been received), the CPU 101 for effect control controls the special winning opening winning flag. It resets (step S3918). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3919), and checks whether the value of the winning counter after addition is 11 or more (step S3920). If the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more, the process proceeds to step S3924.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, it is a case where an over winning to the special winning opening has occurred. In the "over winning", for example, in this embodiment, the upper limit number (10 in this example) of the number of winnings of the game ball to the big winning opening in each round during the big hit game is determined. However, the game ball is to be won in the large winning opening over the upper limit number. For example, in this embodiment, even if a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has not elapsed in each round in the big hit game, if the tenth winning of the big winning opening is detected The big winning opening is controlled to be closed, but when the game ball is won just before the closing of the big winning opening, it may be the 11th or 12th winning and an over winning may occur.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (that is, if an over winning has occurred), the effect control CPU 101 sets a notified flag indicating that the occurrence of the over winning has already been notified. It is judged whether or not it is set (step S3921), and if it is set, the round post-process is ended. Also, if the notification completion flag is not set, over prize notification for notifying occurrence of over winning is performed (step S3922), the notification completion flag is set (step S3923), and the round post-process is ended. In step S3922, specifically, the occurrence of the over winning is notified by causing the frame LED 28 to emit light, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the occurrence of over winning may be notified using the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, or a light emitting member incorporated in the special winning opening. In addition, when a winning to the big winning opening which is not over winning occurs, while making the specified LED light in white, when the over winning occurs, it makes the specified LED rainbow issue (for example, red, blue The light may be emitted sequentially to a plurality of colors such as yellow and yellow. By performing steps S3920 to S3923, it is assumed that the over winning notification is performed only once even when the over winning of two or more balls occurs. As a result, the over winning notification can be performed without making the player feel troublesome.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more (ie, it is not the over winning), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts “15” from the number of notified prize balls S (step S3924), and after subtraction The status display is changed to a value based on the number of notified prize balls S (step S3924A). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of notified prize balls S is "0" (step S3925), and if it is not "0", the round post-process is ended. If it is "0", a special effect of outputting a specific sound from the speaker 27 is executed (step S3926). As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the value notified in the prize ball notification effect has become "0", and the interest can be improved.

  In this mode, after the round is over, the winning to the big winning opening is detected, and when the winning is not the over winning, the status display is changed, and the special ball is determined if the number of notified balls S is “0”. Although the effect is to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning is detected after the round, the change of the state display and the special effect are not executed regardless of whether or not the over winning is achieved (step S3924- The process of S3926 may not be executed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 counts the number of special winning opening winning designation commands received using the winning counter, and it is determined that the value of the winning counter is 11 or more. Although the case where it determines with winning is shown, it is not restricted only to such an aspect. For example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not the number of winnings to the special winning opening has become 11 or more, and may determine whether over winning has occurred. Then, a different large winning opening winning combination designation command is transmitted depending on whether or not it is over winning, and the effect control microcomputer 100 side determines which large winning opening winning combination designation command has been received. It may be configured to recognize whether or not it is over winning.

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S3902), if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the notification completion flag is reset (step S3931), and the special winning opening opening flag is reset. (Step S3932).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the round to be started next is the round 8 (step S3932). Whether it is round 8 or not can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to start is round 8, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the notification pattern is any one of Pt3 to Pt6 (step S3934). If it is any one of Pt3 to Pt6, a process table corresponding to the in-round presentation including the promotion presentation is selected (step S3935). At that time, if the notification pattern is Pt3 or Pt4, select the process table according to the in-round effect including the promotion success effect, and if the notification pattern is Pt5 or Pt6, the process according to the in-round effect including the promotion failure effect It is to select a table. If it is not round 8 in step S3933, or if the notification pattern is Pt1 or Pt2 in step S3934, the effect control CPU 101 processes the process table according to the normal in-round effect (in-round effect not including the promotion effect). The selection is made (step S3936).

  In this embodiment, for example, as the promotion effect, the effect display device 9 displays that the ally character battles with the enemy character. Then, in the promotion success effect, the display is performed in which the ally character wins the enemy character, while in the promotion failure effect, the display in which the ally character loses the enemy character is performed. That is, in the promotion effect, it is reported that if the ally character wins the enemy character that the big hit will continue even after round 9 (that is, it is added), while if the ally character loses to the enemy character, it goes to round 8 It is notified that the big hit ends.

  After step S3935 or step S3936, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the round to be started next is the round 9 (step S3937). Note that whether or not it is round 9 can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to start is round 9, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the notification pattern is Pt3 or Pt4 (step S3938). If it is either Pt3 or Pt4, "1050" is set to the number of announced notified balls S (step S3939), and a new award ball notifying effect based on the new number of notified notified balls S is executed, and a new award ball is generated. The state display based on the notification number S is started (step S3939A). Specifically, a display such as "1050 GET" is performed as a prize ball notification, and "1050" is displayed on the lower right of the effect display device 9 as a status display.

  When Pt3 or Pt4 is selected as the notification pattern, “0” is displayed as the status display at the end of round 8 if 10 or more wins have occurred in each round between round 1 to round 8. It will be displayed. Therefore, by performing step S3939A in round 9, it is possible to show the player that the status display has been added from "0" to "1050".

  In this mode, in the round 9 which is the next round which performed promotion success production, although it was decided to perform prize ball information based on the number S of prize ball informings added, it is not limited to this. For example, a prize ball notification such as “1050 GET” may be performed in round 8 where promotion success effects are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer (step S3940), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effect part) Control of the effect display device 9, various lamps as effect components, and the speakers 27) as effect components is executed (step S3941).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 initializes a winning counter (step S3943). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to 0.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 drives the solenoid 17 to control the variable ball entry device 22 in the open state (step S3944). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to start lighting of the ball entry LED 22a (step S3945).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S 805) (step S 3946).

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set in step S3901 (Y in step S3901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the notification completion flag if it is set (step S3951), and the big hit end designation command reception flag Are reset (step S3952).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the ending effect (step S3953). Further, the effect control CPU 101 measures a value corresponding to the ending period at the end of the big hit game (for example, a value corresponding to 3.0 seconds) to measure the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the big hit game. The effect period measurement timer is set (step S3954).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 starts the process timer (step S3955), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effect part) Control of the effect display device 9, various lamps as effect components, and the speakers 27) as effect components is executed (step S3956).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S 807) (step S 3957).

  In this embodiment, the big winning opening open flag is set in the big hit display processing shown in FIG. 36, the processing in the round shown in FIG. 37, and the round post processing shown in FIGS. Based on the variable winning ball device 20 being controlled to the open state, the variable ball entering device 22 is controlled to the open state (refer to Y, S1912 in step S1901 and Y in S3902 and S3944), and the big winning opening after opening flag The variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to be in the closed state based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be in the closed state (see Y in step S2901, see S2924). Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to the open state in the same cycle as the period in which the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is controlled to the open state.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in the process of opening the big winning opening shown in FIG. 21, the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning ball device 20 during the round of the big hit game is a predetermined number (in this example) , The special variable winning prize ball device 20 is controlled to be in a closed state (see Y in step S1462, see S1465), but such processing is not performed in the processing in the round shown in FIG. Even if the number of gaming balls entered into the ball entry device 22 reaches a predetermined number, processing for controlling the variable ball entry device 22 in the closed state is not performed. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, since the number of game balls to be entered into the variable ball entry device 22 is not limited, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Note that the cycle in which the variable ball entry device 22 and the special variable winning ball device 20 are controlled to the open state does not necessarily have to be the same cycle. For example, instead of controlling the variable ball entering device 22 in the open state in all rounds in the big hit game, a plurality of types of opening such as providing an open pattern that controls the variable ball entering device 22 in the open state only in some rounds You may comprise so that a pattern may be provided. Also, for example, the open condition of the variable ball entry device 22 may be maintained during the interval period, and an open pattern may be provided to control the variable ball entry device 22 into the open state continuously during the big hit game.

  Also, for example, during a big hit game, in a gaming machine configured to determine whether or not there is something that will be a big hit in the suspension storage, in the gaming machine configured to execute pre-read advance notice effect in the big hit game, continue throughout the big hit game Control the variable ball entering device 22 in the open state by controlling the variable ball entering device 22 in the open state so as to predict that there is a big hit among the retention memories It is also good. Also, for example, when a plurality of types of opening patterns of the variable ball entry device 22 are provided, depending on which opening pattern the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, It may be configured to have different expectations with certain things. Also, for example, depending on the degree of expectation that a big hit in the reserved storage will be made, the effect to be performed during opening of the variable ball entry device 22 may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S971). Note that the effect period measurement timer is set based on the end of all rounds of the big hit game in the round post-process (see step S806). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S 972).

  When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and the effect device (effect display device 9 is performed according to the contents of the process data n. , And the speaker 27 etc.) (step S 974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S978). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation specification command reception flag and a second symbol variation specification command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S980).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing a display example of the effect display device 9. The display example shown in FIG. 42 shows a display example where a 15R probability variation hit occurs and the notification pattern is Pt1. For example, when the big hit fluctuation ends, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), the fanfare effect is executed, the prize ball notification 410 is started, and “2250 GET” is displayed. When round 1 is started, the status display 412 is started from "2250" as shown in FIG. 42 (B). Then, the status display 412 is updated each time a winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening occurs, and when nine winnings occur, the status display 412 is "2115" as shown in FIG. 42 (C). Is changed to After that, when two gaming balls win during opening of the big winning opening as round 1, the status display 412 is changed to "2100" based on the winning of the first gaming ball, and the second one Round 1 is ended (see steps S3920 to S3924A) without the status display 412 being changed based on the winning of the gaming ball (the winning of the eleventh gaming ball as round 1 and over-winning). In this case, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), round 2 is started with the state display 412 being displayed as "2100".

  Further, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, in addition to the notification of the winning balls, when the gaming balls pass through the normal winning gate 33 of the winning combination 50 and the gaming balls enter the variable ball entry device 22, The normal prize winning display may be displayed. FIG. 43 is an explanatory view showing a display example of a normal winning a prize display. As shown in FIG. 43, during the big hit game, when the game ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 and the game ball enters the variable ball entry device 22, the normal prize winning display 500 is displayed on the effect display device 9 ( See step S2914). In the example shown in FIG. 43, “+3” is displayed as the normal winning a prize display, and a display is provided to notify that three prize balls have been obtained separately from the prize balls obtained by the winning in the large winning opening. .

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where a normal winning acquisition display such as "+3" is displayed based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the normal winning gate 33 and the gaming ball has entered the variable ball entry device 22. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a predetermined winning sound may be output from the speaker 27 each time the game ball enters the variable ball entry device 22. Further, for example, a predetermined meter display may be performed on the effect display device 9, and a display may be performed such that the scale of the meter gradually increases in response to the ball entry of the gaming ball into the variable ball entry device 22.

  In addition, for example, the game ball may pass through the normal winning gate 33, and may be configured to display the cumulative number of winning balls every time the game ball enters the variable ball entry device 22. Further, for example, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the normal winning gate 33 and entered the variable ball entry device 22 may be counted and displayed.

  Further, for example, based on the fact that the game ball has won on the variable ball entry device 22, the value displayed on the status display 412 of the winning ball notification 410 may be updated to a value obtained by subtracting 3 and displayed. .

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the predetermined area (in this example, the first start winning opening 13, the second start winning opening 14) through which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can pass. And a special area (in this example, the normal winning gate 33) different from the predetermined area through which game media can pass, and a special entry section (in this example, variable entry balls) into which the game medium can enter after passing through the special area Device 22). Further, in the predetermined area, when the game medium passes, variable display is started and the game medium is provided (in the present example, based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) Variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started, and one winning ball is paid out). Also, while the special area does not start variable display even if game media passes, game media is provided by passing the game media (in this example, based on the passage of the game balls of the normal winning gate 33) Three prize balls are paid out, but it does not become a start opportunity of the symbol change). A special discharge area (in this example, the second out port 25) for discharging game media that has passed through the special area but has not entered the special entry section. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving a misunderstanding that the player is lost. Specifically, it can be prevented from being confused with the gaming ball discharged from the normal first out port 26, and it can be suppressed that the player is misunderstood as having lost.

  It should be noted that "the game media has passed" means, for example, a game ball winning like the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 (the game ball enters the winning opening and is taken into the gaming machine as it is) , A prize ball is paid out, and a game ball passes like a normal winning gate 33 (a game ball passes only through the gate and is not taken into the gaming machine but a prize ball is paid out) Is a concept that includes Also, “entering game media” is, for example, a concept that indicates that the game ball does not pay out although the game ball enters the ball like the variable ball player 22.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the normal discharge area (in this example, the first out port 26) different from the special discharge area is provided. The special discharge area is disposed in the vicinity of the special entry part as compared to the normal discharge area (in this example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first out port provided below the game area 7) It is discharged from the second out port 25 provided in the inside of the winning combination 50 close to the variable ball entry device 22 as compared with 26). Therefore, it is a loss to the player by shortening the period until the game ball which did not enter the variable ball entry device 22 is discharged and making it difficult to be recognized that the game ball is discharged without entering the ball. You can make it look like you

  Also, according to this embodiment, the special entry portion changes to a state (in the present example, the open state) in which game media can be entered when being controlled to the predetermined state (in the present example, the big hit gaming state) It is configured as a possible variable entry device (in this example a variable ball entry device 22). Therefore, it is possible to improve interest when being controlled to a predetermined state.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to the open state during the big hit gaming state as a predetermined state, in addition to the prize balls obtained by winning on the special variable winning ball device 20, variable entry It can be seen that a winning ball can be obtained even when entering the ball device 22 (though it is possible to obtain a winning ball by passing the normal winning gate 33). Can further enhance the sense of exhilaration that

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the predetermined state is the jackpot gaming state, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, other gaming states such as a probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state may be set as a predetermined state. That is, for example, the variable ball entry device 22 is configured to be controlled to be in the open state when controlled to be in the positive change state, or to be controlled to be in the open state when being controlled to the short time state. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in the first state (in the present example, the open state) in which game media can be won, and in the second state (in the present example, the closed state) in which game media are difficult or impossible to win. A variable winning prize means (in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 20) is provided, and the variable winning means is changed to the first state when being controlled to the advantageous state (in the present example, the big hit gaming state). Also, similar to the cycle for changing the special entry portion (in this example, the variable entry device 22) to a state in which game media can enter (in this example, the open state) and changing the variable winning means to the first state. The special entry portion is changed to a state where game media can enter according to the cycle. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize a cycle in which the special entry portion changes to a state in which game media can be entered.

  Also, according to this embodiment, after changing the variable winning means (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 20) to the first state (in the present example, the open state), at least the variable winning means The variable winning means can be controlled to the second state (in the present example, the closed state) based on winning a predetermined number (10 in this example). On the other hand, after changing the special entry section (in this example, the variable ball entry device 22) to a state where game media can enter (in the present example, the open state), a predetermined number of game media enter the special entry section. However, control is not performed to change the special entry portion to a state where the game medium can not enter (in the present example, the closed state). Therefore, since the number of game media entering the special entry unit is not limited, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100, the detection signal from the ball detection switch 19 is input to detect ball insertion into the variable ball insertion device 22, or the solenoid 17 is driven. Although the case where the variable ball entry device 22 is controlled to the open state has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, on the side of the game control microcomputer 560, the detection signal from the ball detection switch 19 is input to detect ball insertion into the variable ball storage device 22, or the solenoid 17 is driven to control the variable ball storage device 22. It may be configured to control in the open state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variable ball entry device 22 is a component controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100, and can be said to function as a kind of effect for effect. Therefore, a plurality of variable ball entry devices on which game balls similar to or similar to the variable ball entry device 22 can enter may be arranged on the board of the game board 6.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of playing a game, and in the first state (in the present example, the open state) that the gaming medium (in the present example, the game ball) can be won The variable winning means (in this example, the big winning opening) which can be changed to the second state (in the present example, the closed state) in which the medium is difficult or impossible to win, and the predetermined period (in the present example, 29.5 seconds) A unit game (in this example) in which the variable winning means can be changed to the first state until at least one of the passage of a predetermined number of game media (10 balls in this example) is established , The round) an advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) to execute a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 times for 15R positive variation big hits and 8 times for 8R positive variation big hits) (In this example, the game control microcomputer 56 (Step S305 to S307) and value giving means for giving a predetermined value when the game medium has won the variable winning means (in this example, step S32 in the game control microcomputer 560 is executed) And a portion for driving the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of balls in the microcomputer for payout control), and notification means (in the present embodiment) for notifying in accordance with the value that can be provided in an advantageous state. Then, the game medium is transferred to the variable winning means toward the specific state (in this example, “0” display in this example) corresponding to the notification in the effect control microcomputer 100 and the portion executing steps S3304A, S3507, S3939A). State display means capable of executing state display that changes when winning a prize (in this example, for effect control The status display means changes the status display when a specified number of game media wins more than a predetermined number in one unit game in an advantageous state in the microcomputer 100, and the portion executing steps S2910A, S3924A, S3939A). (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not change the state display when Y in step S3920). As a result, the variable prize means limits the change when the game medium has won a specific number more than the predetermined number, so that the size of the value notified as being available and the value notified as being actually provided Inconsistencies in size (for example, if the status display is changed even if an over winning occurs, the value of the value notified as actually provided rather than the value of the value notified as being possible It can be prevented that the size may increase.

  In this embodiment, the value of the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "predetermined number of prize balls") is displayed as the "state display", but the present invention is not limited thereto. . For example, the value of the number of award balls that have already been paid out (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the number of paid award balls") may be displayed as "status display". In that case, the value is counted up This changes the status display. Further, a meter indicating the value of the winning number of balls may be displayed as the “state display” instead of the value of the winning number of balls itself. Also in this case, a change may be made to decrease the gauge of the meter indicating the value of the scheduled prize ball number, or a change may be made to increase the gauge of the meter indicating the value of the paid prize ball number. May be In addition, it is also possible to change the "state display" by increasing or decreasing the display of the value with the value of the planned number of prize balls or the value of the number of paid prize balls as the numerator. Good. In addition, a change in the display mode of the character (for example, a change in the character itself, a change in the pattern of the character or a color) may be executed as a change in the “state display”.

  Also, in this embodiment, since the value of the scheduled prize ball number is displayed as "state display", the "specific state" is displayed as "0", but the value of the paid prize ball number is "state". In the case of displaying as “display”, the “specific state” is a display such as “2250” or “1200”. Also, when a gauge with a decreasing gauge is displayed as a "state indication", the state in which the gauge of the meter indicates the minimum value is the "specific state", and the gauge with an increasing gauge is displayed as a "state indication" In the case, the state in which the gauge of the meter shows the maximum value is the "specific state".

  Moreover, although it was decided to perform a prize ball alerting | reporting in a fanfare period in this form, it does not restrict to this. For example, the prize ball may be notified during a change (for example, after being shown to be a big hit) or after a round in the big hit gaming state is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification means performs a specific notification when the value that can be given is the largest (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S3303 in step S3304). 2250 GET "is displayed. The display does not include a specific value (for example," MAX GET "is displayed). As a result, since the player can recognize that the maximum value is given, the interest can be improved.

  In addition, although it decided to perform specific alerting | reporting in the effect display apparatus 9 in this form, it does not restrict to this. For example, the specific notification may be performed using the speaker 27 or a predetermined light emitting member.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the special effect executing unit (in this example, a portion of the microcomputer 100 for effect control to execute steps S2912 and S3926) for executing the special effect when the state display changes to the specific state is provided. I decided. As a result, the player can be given a sense of exhilaration, and the interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as the “special effect”, the specific sound is output from the speaker 27. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect using the effect display device 9 or a predetermined light emitting member may be executed as a “special effect”.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification means has different timings (in this example, a fanfare period start timing, a fanfare period) in different types of notification (in this example, “2250 GET” and “1200 GET”) having different contents of notification. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S3304A at the start of the fanfare period and also receives a button operation during the fanfare period). Or step S3507 can be executed at the end of the effective period). This makes it possible to improve the interest.

  The notification timing is not limited to the fanfare period. For example, the notification timing may be a predetermined timing during fluctuation (for example, after being shown to be a big hit) or after a round in the big hit gaming state is started. Further, the notification may be performed at a predetermined timing, or may be performed at a timing when the state display is in a predetermined mode (for example, “0” display).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, in one unit game, a special effect execution means (specifically, effect player capable of executing a specific effect based on the fact that the game medium exceeds the predetermined number and is won in the variable winning means (in this example, over winning). In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided with a portion that executes step S3922), and the specific effect execution means is configured to receive a predetermined number of winnings (in this example, the tenth winning number) and a predetermined number of winnings. Within the specific period (in this example, the round is over (the big winning opening is closed)) and the next after the winnings (in this example, the 11th winning, the 12th winning or the 13th winning) The period until the round starts or the ending period starts. The predetermined time may be set to a timer, which may be the time until the timer times out. When execution of the specific effect is restricted (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 has already set the informing completion flag indicating that the occurrence of the over winning has been notified (Y in step S3921), Step S3922 may not be performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in interest.

  In this embodiment, the "restriction of execution of the specific effect" is performed by not executing the over prize notification for the second and subsequent over wins, but the specific limitation mode is not limited to this. For example, when the second or subsequent over winning is detected, a partial over winning notification is executed, the degree of output is suppressed and the over winning notification is executed, or it is more negative than the first over winning notification It is good also as performing an over prize notification. Specifically, while the light emission member is controlled to emit rainbow light (for example, light is emitted sequentially to a plurality of colors such as red, blue and yellow) when the first over prize occurs, the light emission member is controlled when the second or subsequent over prize occurs. Control of single color light emission (for example, light emission to yellow) may be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the notification means can execute the special notification (in this example, “1050 GET”) corresponding to the value that can be further added after the state display is changed to the specific state (in this example, The effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S3937 to S3939A, and after a predetermined number (10 balls) or more of winnings are generated in each round up to round 8, after the status display becomes "0". , "1050 GET" is displayed as the notification of the remaining seven rounds. This makes it possible to maintain a sense of expectation even when changing to a specific state.

  In addition, in this form, it reports all remaining value that can be provided as “special notification” (round 9 (the remaining round is “7”, and when 10 winning prize winning prize ports are won in each round In the state where it is possible to give a prize ball of “1050”), “1050 GET” is additionally notified), but it is not limited thereto. For example, if a 10R probability variation big hit is additionally provided, if it is a 15R probability variation big hit or a 10R probability variation big hit, special notification of "300 GET" (schedule number of prize balls in the remaining 2 rounds up to round 10) in round 9 In the case of the 15R probability variation big hit, “750 GET” may be further displayed as a special notification in the round 11. In addition, about the timing which performs special information, it is not restricted to the time of the start of the next round which performs promotion success production, for example, it may be at the time of the start of another round, and may be the predetermined timing in the round. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, although the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the notification pattern based on the big hit type, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type in which the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the jackpot and the notification pattern are associated is selected by the game control microcomputer 560 side, and the effect control microcomputer 100 side is associated with the selected jackpot type Notification pattern (for example, Pt1 for 15R probability variation A, Pt2 for 15R probability variation B, Pt3 for 15R probability variation C, Pt3 for 8R probability variation A, Pt4 for 8R probability variation B, Pt5 for 8R probability variation B If it is 15R probability variation big hit A, it is good also as performing prize ball reporting and state display based on Pt6).

  Also, in this mode, when the over prize occurs, the status display is not changed, so that there is no contradiction with the value notified by the prize ball notification, but the state is also achieved when the over prize occurs. If the status display exceeds the number of award balls notified in advance by the notification of the award ball by changing the display (for example, when a winning is generated while the status display becomes "0"), the predetermined display is performed. There may be no contradiction due to For example, “∞” may be displayed or a special display may be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when Pt2 is selected as the notification pattern, the value of the award ball display can be switched from "1200" to "2250" based on detection of one operation during the effective period. Although it was decided that it is, it is not limited to this. For example, the value of the award ball display may be switched from "1200" to "2250" based on detection of two or more predetermined operations, or the award ball display may be performed each time one operation is detected. (For example, whenever it detects one operation on the push button 120, the value of the notification of the winning ball increases by a predetermined value (for example, "150"). In that case, seven operations). Will be changed to “2250”). Also, the button effect may not be provided.

  In addition, if it is a gaming machine that will be a specific big hit (for example, 15R certain variation big hit) when a predetermined effect (for example, "7" or an odd symbol is displayed as a big hit symbol or a stop effect is generated) When the effect of is performed, specific notification (for example, “2250 GET”, “MAX GET”) indicating that the value to be given is maximum may be performed without performing the button effect.

  In addition, as a specific effect example, it is executed as "notification" to display an enemy character (for example, a plurality of zombies to which points corresponding to the number of winning balls are respectively attached) to which points are given during the fanfare period. It is also possible to execute the fact that the enemy character is destroyed and points are given each time a winning occurs as "change in status display". As a button effect during the fanfare period, points may be awarded by destroying the enemy character each time an operation is detected. In addition, a plurality of enemy characters different in attached points may be provided. For example, a character A with 15 points and a character B with 300 points are provided. The character A can be defeated by winning a game ball, and 20 characters B It may be possible that the game ball can be defeated by winning a game ball (if it is possible to finish the round triggered by the winning of 10 game machines as in this embodiment, it is possible to destroy it by winning two rounds) .

  Further, in this embodiment, the big winning opening can be opened only once in one round, but it may be opened a plurality of times. In addition, the opening mode of the special winning opening may be different for each round. For example, in round 1 to round 8, the large winning opening may be opened only once for 29.5 seconds, and in round 9 to round 15, the large winning opening may be opened twice for 0.1 second. .

  Further, in this embodiment, a single large winning opening is provided, but a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. For example, a large winning opening A and a large winning opening B may be provided, and any one of the large winning openings may be opened for each round in the big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, one type of award ball notification and status display is provided, but a plurality of types of award ball notification and status display may be provided. For example, the types of prize ball notification and status display may be different for each jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, you may alert | report the remaining time of the effective period in button production. For example, a display such as “remaining 3 seconds” may be performed, or a display may be performed in which a meter indicating the remaining time of the effective period is decreasing.

  In the above embodiment, the case of providing only positive variation big hits such as 15R positive variation big hits or 8R positive variation big hits as the big hit type (see FIGS. 9B and 9C) is shown, but such a mode is limited. Absent. For example, a big hit normally controlled only in a short time state (high base state) after the end of the big hit game and not controlled in a definite change state (in this case, a short time state (based on ending a predetermined number of variable display after the big hit game ends) The configuration described in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine provided with a high base status) as a jackpot type.

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is such an aspect Not limited. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) is described which shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the production symbol, but the variable provided in the gaming area A gaming machine (so-called second-type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the fact that the gaming ball has won a prize (V prize) in a specific prize opening (V prize opening) in a prize ball device (so-called character) The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

  Further, in this mode, transition to the probability change state is enabled based on the type of the big hit that occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special area where game balls can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when a game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, it shifts to a definite change state, while playing a special area during a big hit May be transferred to the normal state when it does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non probability variation big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passage of the game ball to the special territory according to big hit classification. For example, the ease of passing the gaming ball to the special area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is made a big hit (a substantial probability change big hit) to which the game ball easily passes into the special area, and the big opening type of the big winning opening is short playing into the special area It may be a big hit (a substantially non-probable big hit) in which the ball is difficult to pass.

  In the above embodiment, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence 1 Although one variation pattern command is transmitted, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the rendering device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, FIG. 4). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit, and determines when winning the variation pattern type (prefetching determination), and indicates the result of the winning determination (design designation command) In the case of transmitting the change category command) and performing the advance notice announcement effect based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example The winning determination (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine that seals game media such as, and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

Another gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Predetermined areas (for example, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14) through which game media (for example, game balls) can pass;
A special area (for example, a normal winning gate 33) different from the predetermined area through which game media can pass;
A special entry portion (for example, a variable ball entry device 22) into which game media can enter after passing through the special area;
Control means (for example, drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoids, sensors, second lamp unit 90202, third lamp unit 90203, fourth lamp unit 90204, fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP 90123 A, dedicated IC, etc.),
And output means (for example, serial-to-parallel conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B) for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means.
The output means stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period T in FIG. 56) elapses from the reception of the control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 56) (FIG. 56: timeout) Function),
When the control means outputs a control signal to continuously drive the electronic component over the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). The control signal is output during a predetermined period T).
In the predetermined area, the variable display is started by passing the game medium and the game medium is provided (for example, the first special symbol based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14) And while the variable display of the second special symbol is started, one winning ball is paid out),
While the special area does not start variable display even if game media pass, game media is given by passing game media (for example, three based on the passage of the game ball of the normal winning gate 33) Prize balls will be paid out, but will not be a trigger for changing symbols),
A game machine characterized by comprising a special discharge area (for example, the second out port 25) for discharging game media which has passed through the special area but has not entered the special entry area.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress giving the player a misunderstanding that he has lost. Moreover, since the operation failure of the electronic component can be avoided, the electronic component can be controlled more stably. In particular, since the above-mentioned gaming machine can avoid the operation failure of the electronic component, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the unintended operation and the like at a high level, and hence the entire reliability is excellent. For example, in the case of performing the opening and closing operation of a plate or the like using a solenoid, it is possible to perform the opening and closing operation with excellent reliability at a desired timing. In the case of the prize 50 shown in FIG. 2, the variable ball entry device 22 is opened by providing the opening / closing member 24 and sliding the opening / closing member 24 backward (back side) when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1 by the solenoid 17. Although controlled to a state, it is excellent in the reliability of such operation. In addition, in a gaming machine having a region related to V winning, when the passage (entry) to this region is controlled by the opening and closing member, the reliability of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member is excellent. The improvement in the reliability of the operation as described above leads to a further improvement in the effect of suppressing the misunderstanding that the player is lost.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine capable of operating the electronic components provided in the gaming machine more stably, it is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.) that plays a game,
Control means (for example, drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoids, sensors, second lamp unit 90202, third lamp unit 90203, fourth lamp unit 90204, fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP 90123 A, dedicated IC, etc.),
And output means (for example, serial-to-parallel conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B) for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means.
The output means stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period T in FIG. 56) elapses from the reception of the control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 56) (FIG. 56: timeout) Function),
When the control means outputs a control signal to continuously drive the electronic component over the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). There is a gaming machine characterized by outputting the control signal during the lapse of a predetermined period T).
Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine as another embodiment will be described. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 44 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main substrate.

  Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "gaming machines") 901 are roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (platform) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. And a frame 903. At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 44, the lower right position of the game area 9010), a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and identifies each in a special view game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special figures”) that are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 9010 on the game board 902, an effect display device 905 as display means is provided. The effect display device 905 is configured of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, corresponding to each of the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special figure game and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, effect patterns which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this effect pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. When the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variation display result in the special view game, effects are displayed in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the effect display device 905 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A, or the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols which can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols as the result of the variable display are "derived" (or simply referred to as "derived"). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. .

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided above the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of pending storages (the number of special view pending storages) as the number of pending storage information of the variable display corresponding to the special view game in a distinguishable manner Memory display is performed.

  Here, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B for suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the production symbol is satisfied, the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done.

  A first hold display area 905D and a second hold display area 905U are set in the lower left and right two places in the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first reserve display area 905D, the first special view reserve storage number capable of specifying the number of pieces of first reserve storage information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of images of reserve images H of a sphere (circular) Be done. In the second reserve display area 905U, the second special view reserve storage number capable of specifying the number of second reserve storage information generated based on the second start winning is displayed by the number of images of reserve images H of a sphere (circular) Be done.

  In the first hold display area 905D, the hold image H is displayed in a mode in which the hold image increases on the left side every time the first hold storage information is generated, and variable display based on the first hold storage information is performed At each time, the reserved image H at the right end corresponding to the first reserved storage information is erased, and a display is performed in which the remaining reserved images H are shifted one by one to the right. In the second hold display area 905U, the hold image is displayed in a mode in which the hold image H increases on the right side every time the second hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the second hold storage information is performed At each time, the reserve image H at the left end corresponding to the second reserve storage information is erased, and a display is performed in which the remaining reserve images are shifted leftward one by one.

  While the variable display corresponding to the (shifted, shifted) hold display erased from each of the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U is shown, the fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the variable display is shown during execution of the variable display An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter, referred to as "active image" or "active display") AH is formed in the central portion of the hold display area. In the active display area AHA, the reserved image H displayed in the first reserved display area 905D or the second reserved display area 905U is displayed by, for example, being moved (shifted) to the active display area, etc. The active image AH is displayed in such a manner that it can be identified as corresponding to the hold image. Active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of effect display device 905.

  With regard to the holding image H displayed in each of the first holding display area 905D and the second holding display area 905U, a holding display mode for changing the holding display mode before the variable display of the target holding storage information is executed. Change presentation may be performed. In the on-hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or the shape of the on-hold image H is changed.

  For example, the color of the holding image H can be changed to blue, green and red. It is determined that the pending display mode change effect is executed at a predetermined ratio, and when the variation display result based on the pending storage information of the presentation object becomes the big hit display result, the change after the change by the ratio of blue <green <red When the color of the reserve image H is selected and determined (the selection rate at which blue is the lowest), and the variable display result is an out-of-place display result, the color of the reserve image H after change at a ratio of red <green <blue Is selected (red is the lowest selection rate). As a result, the expectation for a big hit based on the color of the reserved image H after change when the reserved display mode change effect is executed is set to be a ratio of blue <green <red. Therefore, when the on-hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot based on the color of the on-hold image after the change.

  Further, also for the active image AH, similarly to the reserve image H, the display mode change effect is executed, and the display mode such as the color or the shape of the reserve image H is changed. With regard to such a display mode change effect of the active display, the display mode such as the color or shape after the change is determined in such a mode that the degree of expectation to the big hit can be specified at the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change effect. Ru. In addition, about an active display, it is not necessary to perform display mode change presentation.

  Under the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (usually an electric character) is provided to form a second start winning opening as a start area (second start area).

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. To form a winning opening as. On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area 9010, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and in the peripheral portion of the playing area 9010, rendering LEDs 909 are provided. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area 9010 of the pachinko gaming machine 901 . At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area 9010. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area 9010, a stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R provided in the effect display device 905, a special drawing game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A In response to the start of one of the special drawing games of the second special symbol display device 904B and the special drawing game using the second special drawing, variable display of the effect design is started. And the period from when fluctuation display of the production design is started until fluctuation display ends by the stop display of the fixed production design in each production design display area 905L, 905C and 905R of “left”, “middle”, “right” In such a case, the variable display state of the effect pattern may be in a predetermined reach state.

  In addition, in response to reaching the reach state, the variation speed of the production design is reduced, or a character image (a production image imitating a person or the like) different from the production design is displayed in the display area of the production display device 905. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing / displaying a moving image different from the effect pattern, or changing the change mode of the effect pattern, the effect operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as the display of character images and the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of a moving image, and the change of the fluctuation mode of the effect pattern is referred to as "reach effect display" (or simply "reach effect"). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the LED 909 for effect, etc. The operation mode may be different from the operation mode.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability", "big hit reliability", "expected degree", or "big hit expectation"). That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stop-displayed (derived) as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game, the variation display state of the presentation symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the presentation symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed effect design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") variation display mode when the variation display result is "loss".

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stop-displayed (derived) as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game, the variation display state of the presentation symbol becomes a reach state after the variation display of the presentation symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed or the reach effect is not performed, the finalized design pattern to be a predetermined reach losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a fluctuation display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a fluctuation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the fluctuation display result is “loss”.

  In response to the determined special symbol in the special figure game becoming a predetermined normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is performed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed The variable display mode of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "non-probability change" (also referred to as "usually big hit") when the variable display result is a "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-deterministic change", it is controlled to a normally open big hit state, and after that, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the variation display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, as described later, so-called electric Chu support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 906B is increased. In the time-saving control, either of the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variation display result being a "big hit", either condition is established first When it is done, you should finish.

  When a predetermined probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time saving control after the end of the big hit gaming state. By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variation display result (special view display result) becomes the “big hit” in the special view game of each time is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability change control may be ended when the condition that the variation display result becomes “big hit” after the end of the big hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state is controlled again is satisfied. In the same manner as the time saving control, when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time saving or 90 times different from the time saving) after the end of the big hit gaming state, the definite variation control is ended May be In addition, even if the probability change control is ended when it is determined that the probability change control is to be ended in the probability change fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, even if the probability change control is ended. Good.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, a first lamp board 90210, and a second lamp board 90220 as shown in FIG. 45 are mounted. In addition, a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 to the pachinko gaming machine 901, and a relay board 9019 for relaying signals from the effect control board 9012 And so on. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, etc. are arranged on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the effect display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for rendering such as the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, the fourth lamp unit 90204, the fifth lamp unit 90205 and the drive mechanism 90201 Is mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 performs the display operation in the effect display device 905, the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, and the fourth lamp unit 90204. And a function of causing the lighting / extinguishing operation of the fifth lamp unit 90205 or the like, and the operation of the drive mechanism 90201, that is, a function of controlling an electric component for effect to execute a predetermined effect operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The sound control board 9013 causes the speakers 908L and 908R to output sound based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a first lamp driving unit 9014. The first lamp driving unit 9014 is configured to supply a drive signal to each LED of the first lamp unit 909 based on a control signal from the effect control board 9012 to turn on or off each LED separately. The first lamp driving unit 9014 and the first lamp unit 909 may be mounted on the same substrate (a substrate different from the relay substrate 9019) or may be mounted on different substrates.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a second lamp driving unit 9092, a third lamp driving unit 9093, a fourth lamp driving unit 9094, and a fifth lamp driving unit 9095. The second lamp driving unit 9092, the third lamp driving unit 9093, and the fourth lamp driving unit 9094 are mounted on the first lamp substrate 90210. The fifth lamp driving unit 9095 is mounted on the second lamp substrate 90220.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 supplies a driving signal to each LED 90202A (see FIG. 60) of the second lamp unit 90202 based on the control signal supplied from the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9019, and It is configured to turn on or off separately. The third lamp driving unit 9093 supplies driving signals to each LED of the third lamp unit 90203 based on the control signal supplied from the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9019 and the third lamp driving unit 9093, The LEDs are configured to be separately turned on or off. The fourth lamp driver 9094 supplies a drive signal to each LED of the fourth lamp unit 90204 based on the control signal supplied from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019, and turns on or off each LED separately It is configured to let you The fifth lamp driving unit 9095 supplies a driving signal to each LED of the fifth lamp unit 90205 based on the control signal supplied from the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9019 and the fourth lamp driving unit 9094, and The LEDs are configured to be separately turned on or off.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a gift drive unit 9091. The accessory drive unit 9091 is configured to supply a drive signal to a stepping motor or the like of the drive mechanism 90201 based on a control signal from the effect control board 9012 to operate the drive mechanism 90201. The accessory drive unit 9091 and the stepping motor or the like in the drive mechanism 90201 may be mounted on the same substrate (a substrate different from the relay substrate 9019) or may be mounted on different substrates.

  A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 46 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 46A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (A), the command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 46B, for example, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is "lost" or "big hit" or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 47, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 9011, a random number MR1 'for determining the special display result, a random number MR2' for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 'for determining the variation category. The numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 'for determining the common pattern display result and the random number value MR5' for determining the variation pattern is controlled so as to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 ′ to MR5 ′. The CPU 90103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. 51, for example, to change the random number MR1 '. The numerical data indicating a part of ~ MR5 'may be counted.

  FIG. 48 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern. The ROM 90101 of the microcomputer 90100 for game control shown in FIG. 45 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 90101 includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used when the CPU 90103 transmits control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 9011, The data etc. which comprise a table as shown to 48 are memorize | stored.

  FIG. 49 shows a configuration example of the special view display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, as a special view display result determination table, a first special view display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 49A and a second special view display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a determined special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 904A Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table to be referred to for determination based on the random value MR1 'of. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a finalized special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 904B Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table to be referred to for determination based on the random value MR1 'of.

  FIG. 50 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The big hit classification determination table 90131 determines the big hit classification to be any of a plurality of kinds based on the random number value MR2 'for big hit classification determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit". Is a table that is referenced to In the big hit classification determination table 90131, whether to execute the first special view game (the special view game using the first special view) by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special view game by the second special symbol display device 904B The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type according to whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is "non-probability", "probability", " It is assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable".

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 45 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 51, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 51 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a common view reserve storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the first start winning occurs but has not been started yet The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the random number is made by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls As numerical data indicating random number values MR1 'to MR3' extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. as holding data (first special view holding information), storage is performed until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") Do.

  The second special figure reserve storage unit 90151 B is a special figure game that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906 B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 90151 B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of gaming balls) to the second start winning opening, and random number is generated by CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the gaming balls The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 'to MR3' extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. is stored as reserved data (second special view reserved information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg "4") Do.

  In the first special symbol display device 904A, the first special view game suspension data (the first special view suspension information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. The common holding storage unit may store the holding data (second special view holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) in association with the holding number.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 90151C is a held data concerning a common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 although the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 (general drawing holding Store information). For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the game ball passed the passage gate 9041 The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 'for memory is stored as the reserved data (general drawing reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect display device 905 is disposed on the back side of the game board 902 and can be visually recognized through the opening 902 c formed in the game board 902. In the opening 902 c of the game board 902, a frame-shaped center decoration frame 9051 is provided. In addition, a rendering unit 90300 is provided between the rear surface of the game board 902 and the effect display device 905, and the effect control board 9012 includes a drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoids, and the like provided in the effect unit 90300. A plurality of electronic components such as a sensor, a second lamp unit 90202, a third lamp unit 90203, and a fourth lamp unit 90204 are connected. In FIG. 45, illustration of components other than the drive mechanism 90201 and the fifth lamp unit 90205 among the electronic components is omitted.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, and the like) used to control the effect operation. The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 (for example, based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120), of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 905 The video signal is output, and the effect display device 905 displays the effect image. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90123A (see FIG. 54), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 90123B (see FIG. 54), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits, to the display control unit 90123, a display control instruction specifying an effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 905, in accordance with the display control data and the like included in the effect control pattern. The display control unit 90123 is a video signal for displaying an effect image specified by the display control instruction using data stored in a CGROM or the like (storage unit) according to a display control instruction from the effect control CPU 90120. Output As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control of the effect control CPU 90120 (control based on the effect control pattern or the like) is output, and the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 905. Become.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for fetching an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 And including. For example, an output port of the I / O 90125 transmits a video signal transmitted to the effect display device 905, a control signal (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and the first lamp driver 9014. Control signal, and the second lamp driving unit 9092 (or third lamp driving unit 9093), the fourth lamp driving unit 9094 (or fifth lamp driving unit 9095), and the item driving unit 9091 via the relay substrate 9019. The control signal etc. which are transmitted to each are output. The control signal is supplied as a serial signal.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 45 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  For example, the ROM 90121 stores a pending display mode determination table which is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first pending display displayed in the first pending display area 905D to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table and the determination rates of the respective display modes. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the first pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 '(not shown) for determining the display mode of the first pending display There is. Note that one large hold display mode determination table including information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 90121 instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables.

  Further, for example, the hold display mode determination table to be referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second hold display area 905U to any one of a plurality of types is stored in the ROM 90121 There is. Specifically, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table and the determination rates of the respective display modes. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the second pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number MR6 '(not shown) for determining the display mode of the second pending display There is. Note that one large hold display mode determination table including information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 90121 instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables.

  In addition, the ROM 90121 stores a holding effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether the holding effect (also referred to as “action effect” or “hold change effect”) is performed. Specifically, in the holding effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random value MR7 '(not shown) for the execution presence / absence determination of holding effect for each of no execution and with execution of holding effect. Is assigned. In this embodiment, the pending presentation refers to a pre-reading advance presentation effect for changing the display mode of the pending display displayed in the first pending display area 905D to a notice mode, and the pending displayed in the second pending display area 905U. The pre-reading notice effect is to change the display mode of the display to the notice mode. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the effect display device 905 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the effect display device 905 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  Further, the ROM 90121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) for changing a special image including active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence decision table is compared with random number MR7 '(not shown) for execution presence / absence determination of active display change presentation without and with active display change presentation respectively. Are assigned (determined values).

  In this embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing the special image into the notice mode. In other words, an active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, information according to the active display (for example, active display or characters around an active display or a periphery of the active display frame, etc.) It is an effect to be changed (main notice effect). For the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect and the success effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when changing the special image after the common effect is performed and the common effect are performed It includes a failure effect (also referred to as an active display change cassette effect) to be executed later when the special image is not changed. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the effect display device 905 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect does not act on the special image in the display area of the effect display device 905, but acts on the special image in the display area of the effect display device 905 but does not change the display mode of the special image. It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, in the active display change effect, the first system change effect for changing the aspect of the special image to one of a plurality of aspects, which is the change of the first system, and the change of the aspect of the special image to the second system And a second system change effect to be changed to any of a plurality of modes. In the first system change effect, there is a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and in the second system change effect, according to the second system change effect There is a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect. Note that the first system change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display (the active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is an active display frame in the special image (special The effect is to change the display mode of the active display frame displayed as an image.

  In addition, the ROM 90121 is a first system change that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect that is one of the active display change effects (a timing such as which timing of the change is to be executed). An execution timing determination table of effects is stored. In this first system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 90121 stores effect execution timing determination tables of a plurality of first system change effects different from one another in type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, and the determination ratio of each. It may be In the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect are assigned to each of the execution timings. There is. Also, in place of the plurality of first system change performance execution timing determination tables, one large first system change performance execution timing determination table including information of all the first system change performance execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 90121 You may memorize.

  In addition, the second system change is referred to in the ROM 90121 to determine the execution timing of the second system change effect which is one of the active display change effects (a timing such as at which timing in the variation to execute). An execution timing determination table of effects is stored. In this second system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 90121 stores effect execution timing determination tables of a plurality of second system change effects different from one another in type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, and the determination ratio of each. It may be In the execution timing determination table of this second system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing There is. Also, in place of the plurality of second system change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large second system change presentation execution timing determination table including information of all the second system change presentation execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 90121 You may memorize.

  The effect display device 905 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel and the like, a driver circuit for driving the display panel, and the like. The video signal supplied to the effect display device 905 from the display control unit 90123 via the I / O 90125 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal, and causes the display panel to display an image represented by the video signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the effect display device 905.

  The display control unit 90123 also performs control of the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, and the like under the control of the effect control CPU 90120 in addition to the control of the effect display device 905. Here, details of the flow of drive control for the drive mechanism 90201 and light emission control for the first lamp portion 909, the second lamp portion 90202, and the like will be described later.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating a rendering image to the rendering display device 905, and a information signal (rendering sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control substrate 9013 are transmitted to the rendering control substrate 9012. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the first lamp driving unit 9014, wiring for transmitting an information signal indicating a command to the relay substrate 9019, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the effect unit 90300 will be described based on FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52A is a front view showing a rendering unit, and FIG. 52B is a rear view. FIG. 53 is a front view showing (A) when the movable part is in the tilted position, and (B) when the movable part is in the upright position.

  As shown in FIG. 44, FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the effect unit 90300 is provided between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902 and fixed at a predetermined location. A base portion 90301, a movable portion 90302 rotatably provided with respect to the base portion 90301, and an inclined position (see FIG. 53A) in which the movable portion 90302 is horizontally inclined, and an upright position (vertically) And a first effect motor 90303 that rotates between FIG. 53B and FIG.

  In the base portion 90301, a bearing hole 90310 is formed to penetrate and a guide groove 90311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 90310 is formed around the bearing hole 90310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 90310 in the back of the base portion 90301, a first effect motor 90303 for rotating the movable portion 90302 is fixed on the back, and it penetrates the base portion 90301 and protrudes forward A rotary disk 90312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown). The first effect motor 90303 is a part of the drive mechanism 90201.

  A shaft member 90313, which is directed in the front-rear direction, protrudes at a predetermined position of the peripheral edge of the rotary disk 90312. The lower end of the link member 90314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 90313. Further, a detection piece 90315 is provided on the opposite side of the shaft member 90313 in the peripheral edge of the rotary disc 90312, and the detection piece 90315 is detected by a position detection sensor 90316 provided below the rotary disc 90312. The effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the movable portion 90302 is located at the tilt position.

  The movable portion 90302 includes a pivoting member 90320, a movable member 90321 provided on the front side of the pivoting member 90320 so as to be slidable relative to the pivoting member 90320, and a movable member on the back side of the pivoting member 90320 And a rack gear 90322 moving integrally with the 90321. The movable member 90321 can be reciprocated between a first position on the side of the rotation shaft 325 with respect to the rotation member 90320 and a second position where the rotation member is separated from the rotation shaft 90325 from the first position.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 executes movable effect to move the movable member 90321 between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 90302 is in the upright position. ing. When the movable member 90321 is in the first position, at least a portion is retracted below the display screen of the effect display device 905, and at least a portion is superimposed on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 905 at the second position. (See FIG. 44).

  The pivoting member 90320 is a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and is inserted into the bearing hole 90310 from the rear side on the front right side and provided with the pivoting shaft 90325 and the left side of the pivoting shaft 90325 A first guide shaft 90326 inserted from the rear side into the guide groove 90311 and a second guide shaft 90327 protruding from the upper right of the pivot shaft 90325 and inserted from the rear side into the guide groove 90311 are protruded There is.

  The upper end of the link member 90314 is rotatably supported at the tip end of a second guide shaft 90327 which is inserted through the guide groove 90311 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 90301. That is, the rotary disc 90312 and the rotating member 90320 are connected via the link member 90314. In addition, a coil spring 90328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 90325, which always biases the rotation member 90320 toward the standing position.

  On the left side of the first guide shaft 90326, a linear slide groove for guiding the movable member 90321 in the lateral direction is extended in the lateral direction. A second effect motor 90330 for sliding the movable member 90321 is fixed above the slide groove on the front surface of the rotation member 90320, and the drive shaft protrudes through the base portion 90301 to the rear side. A pinion gear 331 for operating the rack gear 90322 is fixed to the front end. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 90330. The second effect motor 90330 is a part of the drive mechanism 90201.

  A hook on which the left end of a tension spring 90323 for urging the rack gear 90322 is protruded rearward on the left rear surface of the pivoting member 90320. Further, a position detection sensor 90333 for detecting a detection piece formed at the right end of the rack gear 90322 is provided on the rear surface on the right side, and the detection piece is detected by the position detection sensor 90333 to produce CPU for effect control 90120 Can identify that the movable member 90321 is located at the first position.

  The movable member 90321 has a disk-like light emitting portion 90321A and an attaching portion 90321B extending rightward from the light emitting portion 90321A. The light emitting unit 90321A is provided with a fifth lamp unit 90205 (not shown) inside, and is capable of emitting light forward. Further, two bosses are provided on the back surface of the mounting portion 90321 B, and the bosses are inserted into the slide grooves of the rotation member 90320 and fixed to the rack gear 90322 to move the movable member 90321 disposed on the front side A rack gear 90322 disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 90320 is integrated.

  The movable member 90321 and the rack gear 90322 which are integrated are guided so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the rotation member 90320 by the two bosses being inserted in the slide grooves. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 90322, a hook 90335, which is engaged with the right end of a tension spring 90323 whose left end is engaged with the hook 90332 of the rotating member 90320, protrudes rearward. That is, one end of the tension spring 90323 is locked to the hook 90332 of the rotation member 90320 and the other end is locked to the hook 90335 of the rack gear 90322, so that the movable member 90321 is always directed to the second position side. Energize.

  In the drive initial state, the movable portion 90302 of the effect unit 90300 configured in this manner is located at the tilt position as shown in FIG. 53 (A). Then, when the rotary disk 90312 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the first effect motor 90303, the second guide shaft 90327 is pulled downward by the link member 90314, and a front view centering on the rotational shaft 90325. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the upright position shown in FIG. 53 (B). Since the biasing force of the coil spring 90328 acts when rotating from the inclining position to the rising position, the load applied to the first effect motor 90303 is reduced. Further, the first effect motor 90303 is reversely driven to rotate from the standing position to the tilting position.

[Details of light emission control and drive control]
Here, referring to FIG. 56, drive control for the drive mechanism 90201 and light emission for the first lamp portion 909, the second lamp portion 90202, the third lamp portion 90203, the fourth lamp portion 90204, the fifth lamp portion 90205, etc. Explain the flow of control.

  The first lamp driving unit 9014 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into drive signals for individually driving each LED of the first lamp unit 909. The serial / parallel conversion IC 9014B (hereinafter referred to as “conversion IC 9014B” Say). A plurality of conversion ICs 9014 B may be provided according to the number of LEDs to be driven. A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9014B. The address may be set by the same method as the conversion IC 9093B described later (details will be described later). The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9014B is supplied from the VDP 90123A to the conversion IC 9014B via the I / O 90125. Each LED of the first lamp unit 909 driven by the first lamp driving unit 9014 is, for example, each structure in the game area 9010 (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the special variable winning ball device 907, etc. Functions as a decorative LED provided around the The board on which the effect control board 9012 and the first lamp driving unit 9014 are provided is electrically connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a harness.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 is a drive signal individually supplied as a serial signal from the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9019, and driving signals for individually driving the respective LEDs 90202A (see FIG. 60) of the second lamp portion 90202. Serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B (hereinafter, also referred to as “conversion IC 9092 B”) that converts into A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9092B. The address may be set by the same method (described in detail later) as the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9093B described later. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9092 B is supplied from the VDP 90123 A to the conversion IC 9092 B via the I / O 90125 and the relay substrate 9019. The effect control board 9012 and the relay board 9019, and the relay board 9019 and the first lamp board 90210 are electrically connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a harness.

  The third lamp driving unit 9093 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into drive signals for individually driving each LED of the third lamp unit 90203. The serial / parallel conversion IC 9093B (hereinafter referred to as “conversion IC 9093B” Say). A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9093 B (details will be described later).

  The control signal includes a portion for specifying an address. The conversion IC 9092 B and the conversion IC 9093 B are connected, and when the address designated by the supplied control signal is not the same as its own address (here, the address designates the conversion IC 9093 B) In this case, the control signal is supplied as it is to the conversion IC 9093B. As described above, the conversion IC 9093 B receives the control signal via the conversion IC 9092 B, which is a conversion IC located in the previous stage. With such a configuration, the control signal is accurately supplied to the conversion IC having the address designated by the control signal. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9092B or the conversion IC 9093B is supplied from the CPU 90120 for effect control to the conversion IC 9092B of the second lamp driver 9092 via the I / O 90125 and the relay substrate 9019.

  The fourth lamp driving unit 9094 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into drive signals for individually driving each LED of the fourth lamp unit 90204. The serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9094B (hereinafter referred to as “conversion IC 9094B” Say). A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9094B. The address may be set by the same method as the conversion IC 9093B or the like. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9094 B is supplied from the VDP 90123 A to the conversion IC 9094 B via the I / O 90125 and the relay substrate 9019. The LEDs of the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, and the fourth lamp unit 90204 which are driven by the second lamp driving unit 9092, the third lamp driving unit 9093, and the fourth lamp driving unit 9094, respectively, are, for example, game areas It functions as a part of the LED 909 for presentation provided in the peripheral part of 9010. Therefore, the first lamp substrate 90210 is provided at the periphery of the game area 9010.

  The fifth lamp driving unit 9095 converts a control signal supplied as a serial signal into drive signals for individually driving each LED of the fifth lamp unit 90205. The serial / parallel conversion IC 9095B (hereinafter referred to as “conversion IC 9095B” Say). A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9095B. The address may be set by the same method as the conversion IC 9093B or the like. The control signal supplied to the conversion IC 9095B is supplied from the VDP 90123A to the conversion IC 9094B via the I / O 90125 and the relay substrate 9019. Each LED of the fifth lamp unit 90205 driven by the fifth lamp driving unit 9095 is provided in the light emitting unit 90321A shown in FIG. 52 (A). The second lamp substrate 90220 itself is also provided in the light emitting unit 90321A, and the control signal from the fourth lamp driving unit 9094 is supplied via the wiring 90361 shown in FIG.

  Which control signal VDP90123A outputs to the conversion IC 9014B, conversion IC 9092B or conversion IC 9094B depends on the lighting data stored in the CGROM 90123B (the lighting pattern of the LEDs, data indicating which LEDs are to be lighted, etc.) It is specified. The lighting data is compressed and stored in the CGROM 90123B. This is because the VDP 90123A is specified to use compressed data. This allows data to be handled efficiently. And it can control that the amount of data becomes large.

  The VDP 90123 A supplies a control signal according to lighting data to the conversion IC 9014 B, the conversion IC 9092 B, and the conversion IC 9094 B under the control of the CPU 90120 for effect control (provides a control signal for specifying the address of the supply destination IC) . The conversion IC 9014B, the conversion IC 9092B, and the conversion IC 9094B are provided with a latch circuit, a shift register, etc., and data signals other than the part for specifying the address among the control signals for specifying the own address (here, High or Low for each bit) The serial control signal is converted into a parallel drive signal by separating the 24-bit data signal indicating the signal into each drive signal (1-bit data signal (High signal or Low signal)), and LED) At the same time, each converted parallel drive signal is supplied. By sequentially repeating such operations, the first lamp unit 909, the second lamp unit 90202, the third lamp unit 90203, the fourth lamp unit 90204, and the fourth lamp unit 90204 in an aspect (emission color, light emission period) according to lighting data 5 The lamp unit 90205 emits light.

  In addition, LED90202A (and LED90202B) of a 2nd lamp | ramp part has each LED of RGB as mentioned later. The same applies to the LEDs of other lamp parts. Further, the drive signal is generated corresponding to each of the RGB LEDs, and is individually input to each of the RGB LEDs. In this embodiment, the LED turns on (emits light) by the low signal. Since the drive signal is repeatedly output each time the control signal is supplied, the supply period of the Low signal is extended when the Low signal is continuously output. When the supply period of the low signal (the number of times the low signal is output) is long, the light emission period of the LED becomes long, and the LED appears to emit light by that much. As described above, the drive signal that is repeatedly output is subjected to PWM control by the number of times of Low signal, and the light emission luminance of each LED (emission luminance of each color) is gradation controlled by the light emission period by PWM control Be done. Therefore, each LED 90202A is capable of individual color emission according to the control signal supplied repeatedly (it is possible to express various colors by adjusting the luminance (emission period) of each LED of RGB) ).

  A serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9091 B (hereinafter referred to as “conversion,” converts the control signal supplied as a serial signal into drive signals for individually driving each stepping motor (generally plural) of the drive mechanism 90201. IC9091B ”and a drive driver 9091C for supplying a drive current corresponding to the drive signal to the drive mechanism 90201. A unique address is set in the conversion IC 9091B. The address may be set by the same method as the conversion IC 9093B described later (details will be described later). The drive mechanism 90201 is the first effect motor 90303 or the second effect motor 90330 shown in FIG. The feature drive unit 9091 itself is provided in the game board 902, and the motor control signal from the drive driver 9091C of the feature drive unit 9091 is transmitted to the first effect motor 90303 and the second effect motor 90330 through the wiring. Supplied. The board on which the effect control board 9012 and the article driving unit 9091 are provided is electrically connected via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a harness.

  Which control signal is output by the effect control CPU 90120 depends on the drive data (how to move the motor of the drive mechanism 90201, etc., which motor is included, or which motor is included in the effect control pattern stored in the ROM 90121) It is specified by data etc. The lighting data and the driving data are stored in the ROM 90121 without being compressed. This is because the effect control CPU 90120 is designed to use non-compressed data. This allows data to be handled efficiently.

  The effect control CPU 90120 supplies a control signal according to the drive data to the conversion IC 9091 B via the relay substrate 9019. The conversion IC 9091 B includes a latch circuit, a shift register, and the like, and among the control signals specifying its own address, data signals other than the portion specifying the address (here, 24-bit data indicating High or Low for each bit). Converts serial control signals into parallel drive signals by separating them into drive signals (1-bit data signals (High signal or Low signal)), etc., and converts them into drive targets (each stepping motor) The respective parallel drive signals are simultaneously supplied. By sequentially repeating such an operation, the drive mechanism 90201 operates in a manner according to the drive data to drive the movable member 90321.

  The sound output via the sound control board 9013 is performed by the effect control CPU 90120, but may be performed by the display control unit 90123. Further, under the control of the CPU 90120 for effect control, the VDP 90123A generates a video signal according to the image data stored in the CGROM 90123B, supplies it to the effect display device 905, and causes the effect image to be displayed. The image data is compressed and stored in the CGROM 90123B. This is because the VDP 90123A is specified to use compressed data. This allows data to be handled efficiently. And it can control that the amount of data becomes large.

  The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the second lamp driving unit 9092 via the relay board 9019 and supplies power to the second lamp unit 90202 via the second lamp driving unit 9092. For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs VCC for the conversion IC 9092B of the second lamp driving unit 9092, outputs VCL1 for the LED 90202A of the second lamp unit 90202, and outputs VCL2 for the LED 90202B. These are supplied in separate lines to the conversion IC 9092B and the LEDs 90202A, 90202B, respectively (ie, power is supplied in separate supply lines). The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the first lamp driving unit 9014 through the relay board 9019, and supplies power to the first lamp unit 909 through the first lamp driving unit 9014. For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs VCC for the conversion IC 9014 B of the first lamp driver 9014, and outputs VCL 1 for the LED of the first lamp 909. These are provided on separate lines to the conversion IC 9014B and the LED, respectively. The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the third lamp driving unit 9093, the fourth lamp driving unit 9094, and the fifth lamp driving unit 9095 as in the second lamp driving unit 9092.

  Note that each VCC and each VCL1 (or each VCL2) supplied to each conversion IC and each LED may be generated independently of each other and supplied on separate supply lines, or at least a part of the common voltage. It may be

  The effect control board 9012 supplies power to the gift drive unit 9091 via the relay board 9019. The gift drive unit 9091 supplies power to the drive mechanism 90201 based on the power from the effect control board 9012 to operate the drive mechanism 90201 (power may be supplied in the form of a drive signal). For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs VDD as a voltage necessary for driving the stepping motor of the drive mechanism 90201, and the VDD is finally supplied to the stepping motor of the drive mechanism 90201.

  Further, the effect control board 9012 outputs 5 V (VCC) as a voltage necessary for driving the conversion IC, and the VCC is supplied to the conversion IC 9091 B of the accessory driving unit 9091. For example, the effect control board 9012 outputs 5 V (VCC) as a voltage necessary to drive the drive mechanism 90201 to the conversion IC 9091B.

  A detection signal from a rotational position sensor provided in the drive mechanism 90201 (a signal obtained by detecting an initial position of a motor for moving the movable member 90321) is fed back to the CPU for effect control 90120.

  A plurality of serial-to-parallel conversion ICs (conversion ICs 9014B, 9091B to 9095B) may be provided according to the number of driving targets (control targets) (stepping motor, LEDs, etc.) and the number of terminals (for example, In the drive unit 9091, one or more other conversion ICs of the same type are provided in addition to the conversion IC 9091B). In this case, a plurality of conversion ICs (conversion ICs of the same type) are connected in series, and each has a unique address. The effect control CPU 90120 and the VDP 90123A output a control signal for specifying the address of the conversion IC connected to the drive target. When the control signal is output, the first conversion IC among the conversion ICs connected in series receives the control signal first. When the control signal designates the address of the first conversion IC, the first conversion IC converts the control signal into a parallel drive signal and outputs it. If the control signal does not specify the address of the first conversion IC (if the subsequent conversion IC is specified), the first conversion IC directly transmits the control signal to the second conversion IC connected Output. If the control signal from the first conversion IC designates its own address, the second conversion IC connected converts the control signal into a parallel drive signal and outputs it. If it does not specify its own address, the control signal is supplied to the conversion IC connected next as described above. As a result, the control signal can be transmitted to the desired conversion IC. When there are a plurality of conversion ICs 9092B, a control signal for specifying the address of the conversion IC 9093B passes through each of the plurality of conversion ICs 9092B and is supplied to the conversion IC 9093B.

  With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the audio control board 9013 to output audio, or the first via the display control unit 90123 or the first lamp driving unit 9014. The lamp unit 909 is turned on / off, the second lamp unit 90202 is turned on / off via the display control unit 90123 and the second lamp driving unit 9092, and the display unit 90123 or the third lamp driving unit 9093 is The third lamp unit 90203 is turned on / off, the fourth lamp unit 90204 is turned on / off via the display control unit 90123 and the fourth lamp driving unit 9094, and the display control unit 90123 and the fifth lamp driving unit 9095 are The fifth lamp unit 90205 is turned on / off via the drive mechanism 902 via the gift drive unit 9091. 1 is operated, move the movable member 90321, and or to display an effect image to the display area of the effect display device 905 via the display control unit 90123 executes various effects of.

  Next, an output method (timing) of a control signal output from the effect control board 9012 will be described. As described above, based on the control signal output from the effect control board 9012, the conversion ICs 9091B to 9095B output drive signals for driving the electronic components to be driven (drive mechanism 90201, LED, etc.). As a method for continuously driving the electronic component, for example, when the conversion IC receives an input of a control signal (ON signal) for outputting a drive signal, the output of the drive signal is stopped. It is conceivable to continue outputting the drive signal until it receives the input of the control signal (OFF signal) of

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of control signals and drive signals. Referring to FIG. 55, when the control signal (ON signal) is output at time t1 and the conversion IC receives the input of the control signal, the conversion IC continues to output the LED drive signal. In this case, the LED will stay on. As described above, although the LED drive signal is output as a PWM signal, FIG. 55 is simplified for the sake of explanation.

  However, according to the above configuration, for example, in a state in which each conversion IC receives an input of a control signal (ON signal) to drive an electronic component, thereafter, of the wiring connecting the effect control board 9012 and each conversion IC If a part of the conversion IC is broken or shorted, each conversion IC can not receive the input of the control signal (OFF signal), and the electronic component is unintentionally continuously driven. Therefore, the electronic component may be damaged (for example, the motor of the drive mechanism 90201 may be damaged).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as the conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B, conversion ICs having a function (timeout function) capable of stopping the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the input of the control signal are used. Here, a method for continuously driving an electronic component when using a conversion IC having a time-out function will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing another example of the timing chart of the control signal and the drive signal. 56, at time t1, when a control signal (ON signal) is output from effect control substrate 9012 and the conversion IC receives an input of the control signal, the conversion IC outputs an LED drive signal. Next, the conversion IC receives the input of the control signal and stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period T (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from (for example, time t1) (time t2). The timing at which a control signal is output from the effect control board 9012 and the timing at which the conversion IC receives an input of the control signal are so small that they can be ignored. Therefore, the LED is turned on from time t1 to time t2, but the LED is turned off until the conversion IC receives the input of the control signal (time t3).

  Next, at time t3, a control signal (ON signal) is output from the effect control board 9012, and when the conversion IC receives an input of the control signal, the conversion IC outputs an LED drive signal. Then, in order to continuously turn on the LED (in other words, to continuously drive the electronic component over the predetermined period T), the effect control board 9012 outputs the control signal at a predetermined time from time t3. At time t4 before the period T has elapsed, the control signal is output again. Since the conversion IC receives the control signal at time t4 before the predetermined period T elapses from time t3 at which the control signal is received, the conversion IC continues output without stopping the output of the drive signal. Similarly, the effect control board 9012 outputs the next control signal at time t6 (time t7, time t8) before the predetermined period T elapses from time t5 (time t6, time t7) at which the previous control signal was output. Therefore, the LED can be kept on continuously from time t3.

  In the example of FIG. 56, there are time intervals (for example, time t3 to time t4, time t4 to time t5, and the like) after the effect control board 9012 outputs the control signal until the next control signal is output. Although the same configuration has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Specifically, when driving the LED continuously, the effect control board 9012 satisfies the condition that the control signal is output again while the predetermined period T elapses after the control signal is output. Then, each time interval may not be the same.

  As described above, it is important to prevent the output of the control signal (ON signal) to the conversion IC from being interrupted in order to drive the electronic component continuously when using the conversion IC having a time-out function. Become. Therefore, the effect control board 9012 is an output for complementarily outputting the control signal in preparation for the case where the effect control CPU 90120 that outputs the control signal or the VDP 90123A can not output the control signal due to a hang-up or the like. Circuits (or software programs) may be provided. For example, this output circuit has a function of continuously outputting the control signal stored in the output buffer of the RAM 90122.

  Note that this timeout function may be configured to be enabled or disabled. Specifically, when the predetermined terminal of each conversion IC is grounded, the time-out function is set to be valid, and when the predetermined terminal is grounded via a resistor, the function is set to be invalid. . Note that the present invention is not limited to the configuration fixedly set as hardware as described above, and for example, a command from the effect control board 9012 (the effect control CPU 90120, VDP 90123A) (setting command for enabling or disabling the time-out function) Each conversion IC may be configured to enable or disable the function according to whether the input of the terminal is at H level or L level).

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing still another example of the timing chart of the control signal and the drive signal. Referring to FIG. 57, from time t1 to time t4, the control signal (ON signal) is output from VDP 90123A at regular intervals from the VDP 90123A, so the LED maintains the lighting state during this period. Here, it is assumed that after the VDP 90123A outputs the control signal at time t4, it hangs up and can not output the control signal. In this case, the output circuit continues to output the control signal (ON signal) remaining in the output buffer as a buffer signal after time t5. Specifically, the output circuit outputs the buffer signal again after the buffer signal is output and until the predetermined period T elapses. As a result, even when the VDP 90123A that outputs the control signal at the main end hangs up, the lighting state of the LED can be maintained. Note that the output circuit has a function of detecting that the VDP 90123A has hung up.

  Next, a method of setting an output waveform shape of a signal in the case of supplying (outputting) a control signal and a clock signal from one conversion IC to another conversion IC will be described. As described above, the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9095B which are not directly connected to the relay substrate 9019 receive the control signal and the clock signal through the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9094B, respectively.

  Here, the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B are provided on the same substrate (first lamp substrate 90210), but the conversion IC 9094B and the conversion IC 9095B are provided on different substrates (first lamp substrate 90210 and second lamp substrate 90220). It is provided. That is, the conversion IC 9092B and the conversion IC 9093B are electrically connected in the same substrate, and the conversion IC 9094B and the conversion IC 9095B are electrically connected outside the substrate. Specifically, the first lamp substrate 90210 and the second lamp substrate 90220 are connected by a wiring member such as a cable. When the conversion ICs are connected within the substrate, the waveform attenuation rate is smaller and the external noise resistance is higher than when the conversion ICs are connected outside the substrate (via a cable or the like). From this, in order to reduce unnecessary radiation noise, as shown in FIG. 58, the waveform shape is changed between the in-substrate connection and the out-of-substrate connection.

  FIG. 58 is an image diagram of an output waveform of a signal. 58, each conversion IC normally slew rate (FIG. 58 (a)) or low slew rate (FIG. 58 (a)) when outputting an input control signal and a clock signal to another conversion IC. It can be set in FIG. 58 (b). Each conversion IC is provided with a through output of a clock signal to be output and a setting terminal SE (see FIGS. 60 and 62) for setting a through rate of a through output of a control signal to be output. When setting terminal SE is set to L (low) (see FIG. 60), the through output of the clock signal and control signal is set to an output of a normal slew rate, and setting terminal SE is set to H (high) (see FIG. 62) Then, the through output of the clock signal and the control signal is set to the low through rate output.

  The output waveform of the normal slew rate is an output waveform in which the waveform rises in a manner of change equal to or more than that of the input signal (control signal and clock signal). Specifically, when the normal slew rate is set, the slope (voltage change amount per unit time) of the rising portion of the signal output to the other conversion IC corresponds to that of the rising portion of the input signal. It becomes more than inclination. Further, the low through rate output waveform is an output waveform in which the waveform rises in a mode of change slower than that of the normal through rate output waveform. Specifically, when the low through rate is set, the slope of the rising portion of the signal output to the other conversion IC is smaller than the slope of the rising portion of the input signal.

  In the high through rate output waveform, the signal is rapidly switched from the OFF signal to the ON signal and from the ON signal to the OFF signal, and at this moment, spiked current flows in the conversion IC or the like. Such a sudden change of the current causes an induced voltage according to a parasitic inductance of a circuit such as a conversion IC, which causes noise. On the other hand, in the low slew rate output waveform, switching from the OFF signal to the ON signal and from the ON signal to the OFF signal is gradual compared to the high slew rate output waveform, and the current flowing to the conversion IC at this moment can be reduced. . Therefore, the low slew rate output waveform can suppress the generation of noise as compared to the high slew rate output waveform, and as the low slew rate output waveform, the slower the signal rise, the smaller the level of the harmonics. can do. However, when the signal is affected by noise from the outside, there is a possibility that the ON signal can not be recognized by the conversion IC or the like in the low slew rate output waveform due to the influence of the noise. However, in the case of a high slew rate output waveform, compared with a low slew rate output waveform, there is a high possibility that the ON signal can be recognized by a conversion IC or the like even under the influence of noise. That is, although the low slew rate output waveform is difficult to radiate noise to the outside, it is characterized by being vulnerable to external noise. On the other hand, a high slew rate output waveform tends to radiate noise to the outside, but is characterized by being resistant to external noise.

  Accordingly, when the conversion IC 9092 B and the conversion IC 9093 B are connected in the substrate and the waveform attenuation is small and the external noise resistance is high, the conversion IC 9092 B that outputs the control signal to the conversion IC 9093 B is output with a low through rate waveform. By setting as such, it is possible to reduce the amount of high frequency noise generated due to the rise of the signal. On the other hand, when connected outside the substrate like the conversion IC 9094B and conversion IC 9095B and waveform attenuation is large and susceptible to external noise, the conversion IC 9094B that outputs a control signal to the conversion IC 9095B usually outputs the waveform of through rate The external noise resistance is enhanced by setting the

  Here, each conversion IC may have a function of compensating the output waveform for the input control signal, clock signal, and data input from the DATA / I terminal. That is, in general, the clock signal and control signal output from the effect control board 9012 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching each conversion IC is large In some cases, a clock signal or a control signal of a waveform that is broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. Therefore, the conversion IC does not simply output the input clock signal or control signal as it is, but in this way, the clock signal or control signal input in the state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave is converted to the original rectangular wave It may be provided with a function of compensating for a waveform close to 出力 and outputting. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by setting the setting terminal SE, the output is compensated for a waveform with a large rising or falling slope, so that an output in a state closer to the original rectangular wave A signal can be output, and the influence of extraneous noise can be reduced. However, since the amount of voltage change instantaneously increases when the slope of the rise or fall is large as described above, radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate may be increased.

  On the other hand, if the low slew rate output is set by setting the setting terminal SE, the rising and falling slopes are compensated and output to a smaller waveform, so compared to the normal slew rate output, Although it is weak against the influence of external noise, it is possible to reduce the amount of instantaneous voltage change and to suppress the increase of radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate.

  The function of compensating for the output waveform may be set to be enabled or disabled, and all functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. Further, an amplifier circuit or the like may be provided outside the conversion IC to realize the function of compensating the above-mentioned output waveform outside the conversion IC.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, compensation is made such that the slope of the rising and falling edges of the output waveform is larger than the slope of the rising and falling edges of the input waveform. As the output setting of, the input waveform may be output as it is without performing the compensation of the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low through rate output setting, a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising of the input waveform may be output.

  Even when the conversion ICs are connected within the substrate, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the control signal is transmitted from the conversion IC that has received the input of the control signal via the relay substrate 9019. In the case of branching and outputting to a plurality of conversion ICs, the conversion ICs receiving the input of the control signal are set to output a waveform of a normal slew rate. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modification of connection of conversion ICs.

  Referring to FIG. 59A, the conversion IC 9092B is provided on the same substrate (first lamp substrate 90210) as the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B. However, unlike the example of FIG. 54, the conversion IC 9092B is electrically connected to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B in the substrate. More specifically, the conversion IC 9092B branches the control signal and supplies the control signal to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B. Therefore, the waveform of the control signal output from the conversion IC 9092 B is easily attenuated due to the branching loss, so that the influence of external noise is easily generated. Therefore, in such a case, noise immunity from the outside is enhanced by setting the conversion IC 9092B to output a waveform of a normal slew rate.

  59B, the conversion IC 9092B is provided on the same substrate (first lamp substrate) as the conversion IC 9093B, and the conversion IC 9094B is provided on the third lamp substrate 230. Here, although the conversion IC 9092B is electrically connected to the conversion IC 9093B in the substrate, it is electrically connected to the conversion IC 9094B outside the substrate. More specifically, as in the case of FIG. 59 (a), the conversion IC 9092B branches the control signal and supplies the control signal to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B. Therefore, in this case as well, by setting the conversion IC 9092B to output a waveform of the normal slew rate, the noise tolerance from the outside is enhanced.

  In FIG. 59A, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the conversion IC 9092B is connected to the conversion IC 9093B and the conversion IC 9094B is connected to the conversion IC 9093B (a configuration in which each conversion IC is connected in series) Since the signal waveform is difficult to attenuate and is not easily affected by external noise, the conversion IC 9092 B and the conversion IC 9093 B may be set to output a low through rate waveform.

  Next, a specific circuit configuration example of the second lamp driving unit 9092 and the second lamp unit 90202 will be described. As described above, the second lamp driving unit 9092 includes the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B. An example of the circuit configuration of these is shown in FIG.

  The second lamp driving unit 9092 includes a connector 9017A, and is connected to the outside by the connector 9017A. The connector 9017A has eight terminals. The first and fourth terminals are grounded. The second terminal is connected to an external data line to which a control signal is supplied. The third terminal is connected to an external clock line to which a clock signal for synchronizing the control signal is supplied. Each line is connected to an output terminal of a control signal and a clock signal (a synchronization signal supplied from the effect control board 9012) in the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B of the second lamp driver 9092. The fifth and sixth terminals are connected to an external power supply line (a line from the relay substrate 9019 or a line from the effect control substrate 9012), and a voltage of VDD (12 V) is applied. Ru. That is, for power supply, two terminals (four terminals in total because they are also required to be grounded) are used. Normally, the current value of the current that can be supplied to the connection terminal is fixed (for example, up to 1A), but the current value for driving the LED 90202A of the second lamp unit 90202 is large (for example, 1.5A) And two terminals are secured to secure the current value of the current for driving the LED 90202A. The seventh terminal is connected to an external power supply line to which VCC (a voltage for driving the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092 B or the like) is supplied, and the eighth terminal is grounded. VCL and VCC are supplied separately and are not shared (in other words, the power supply line supplying power to the LED 90202A and the power supply line supplying power to the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B are separate) . Therefore, even if a large current flows in the LED 90202A, the voltage VCL is not affected, so that the resistance value of the resistor R2 can be smaller than that of the resistor R1, and the emission luminance of the LED 90202A can be increased. Of course, VCL and VCC may be shared without being supplied separately.

  The fifth and sixth terminals are connected to the power supply line L1. The power supply line L1 steps down VDD (12 V) supplied via the fifth and sixth terminals to VCC (5 V) by the power supply IC 541C and sets it as VCL1 in the second lamp drive unit 9092 (serial / parallel conversion IC 9092 B, etc.) And an output supplied to the LED 90202B as VCL2 without being stepped down by the power supply IC 541C. That is, the second lamp portion 90202 can be provided with LEDs (LEDs 90202A, LEDs 90202B) that are driven by different voltages by separating the output supplied by the power supply IC 541C.

  Here, in the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 60, a serial to parallel conversion IC 9092B is used in which the LED 90202A driven by VCL1 (5 V) and the LED 90202 B driven by VCL2 (12 V) are used in combination. Therefore, the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B is connected to the ESD (Electro-Static Discharge) protection terminal SCR with the high drive voltage VCL2 (12 V). Thus, in the circuit configuration, a voltage of 12 V or more can flow through the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B to the ESD protection terminal SCR, so circuit damage due to high voltage due to electrostatic discharge can be avoided.

  A noise filter may be provided at the output of VCL1 of the power supply IC 541C to remove noise. Further, the output of VCL1 of the power supply IC 541C is connected to one end of the capacitor C1, and the other end of the capacitor C1 is grounded. Such a circuit configuration stabilizes the potential of VCL1.

  A noise filter may be provided at the output of VCL 2 of the power supply IC 541 C to remove noise. Further, the output of VCL2 of the power supply IC 541C is connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is grounded. Such a circuit configuration stabilizes the potential of VCL2.

  A noise filter may be provided at the output of VCC to remove noise. Further, the output of VCC is connected to one end of the capacitor C3, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is grounded. With such a circuit configuration, stabilization of the potential of VCC is achieved.

  The second lamp driver 9092 includes a serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B. The DATA terminal and the CLK terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B are connected to the second and third terminals of the connector 9017A by the data line L4 and the clock line L5. Accordingly, the control signal is input from the second terminal of the connector 9017A to the DATA terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B through the data line L4, and the clock signal is serial from the third terminal of the connector 9017A through the clock line L5. • Input to the CLK terminal of the parallel conversion IC 9092B. Amplifiers A1 and A2 are connected in the middle of data line L4 and clock line L5, respectively, and pull-up resistors R5 and R6 are connected, respectively. As a result, the control signal and the High signal or the Low signal as the clock signal can be accurately transmitted to the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B. A protection circuit HK is also connected to the data line L4 and the clock line L5. The protection circuit HK is a circuit that protects the second lamp driver 9092 from electrostatic discharge, and includes a protection element S1 including a diode array and the like. VCL2 (12 V) is also applied to the protective element S1. The protection circuit HK also comprises a capacitor C5 connected between VCL2 and ground and to the protection element S1.

  Terminals ADR0 to ADR4 of the serial to parallel conversion IC 9092B are terminals for setting an address of the serial to parallel conversion IC 9092B. Here, since all the terminals ADR0 to ADR4 are grounded, "00000" is set as the address. By connecting at least one of ADR0 to ADR4 to an LDO terminal or the like, the portion corresponding to that terminal is set to "1". By doing this, the address is set (for example, when the terminal ADR0 is connected to the LDO terminal or the like, the address becomes "10000").

  The terminals Q0 to Q23 of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B output drive signals obtained by converting control signals. The terminals Q0 to Q20 are connected to cathodes of respective RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202A. The anode of each of the RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202A is connected to the output of the power supply IC 541C, and VCL1 is applied. For this reason, when a Low signal is output as a drive signal, a current flows through the LED connected to the terminal from which the Low signal is output, and the LED emits light. The terminals Q21 to Q23 are connected to cathodes of respective RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202B. The anode of each of the RGB LEDs included in the LED 90202B is connected to the output of the power supply IC 541C, and VCL2 is applied. For this reason, when a Low signal is output as a drive signal, a current flows through the LED connected to the terminal from which the Low signal is output, and the LED emits light.

  The terminal LDO of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B and the terminal DVDD output a predetermined voltage. The terminal LDO and the terminal DVDD are grounded via the capacitors C5 and C6. The terminal R_Iref is grounded via the resistor R1 and connected to the capacitors C5 and C6. In the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B used in this embodiment, when a Low signal is output as a drive signal to at least one of the terminals Q0 to Q23, a current (a plurality of when a plurality of LEDs emit light) The sum of the currents flowing in the respective LEDs of the LED) flows from the terminal R_Iref to the ground via the resistor R1. The current value of the current (current flowing to each LED) depends on the resistance value of the resistor R1. Conventionally, the terminal R_Iref has been directly grounded. However, when the terminal R_Iref is directly grounded, the LED is driven with a constant current using the internal resistance of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B as a reference resistance. When the output current is fixed at 20 mA, about 30% due to variations in internal resistance. There was an error in the current value, which could cause the light emission of the LED to be sparse. Therefore, since the resistor R1 is connected to the terminal R_Iref and the LED is driven with a constant current using the resistor R1 as a reference resistor, when the output current is fixed at 20 mA, the resistance value of the resistor R1 is varied to about 3 An error of about% can be suppressed, and the light emission of the LED can be stabilized.

  Each terminal VDD of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B is connected to the output of the seventh terminal of the connector 9017A, and VCC1 is applied. The terminal VREF is grounded via a capacitor C7. Each terminal VDD is also grounded via capacitors C8 to C11 (thereby stabilizing the voltage applied to each terminal VDD). The terminal GND is grounded.

  The terminal DATA0 is connected to the terminal DATA of the next conversion IC (for example, the serial / parallel conversion IC 9093B of the third lamp driver 9093 shown in FIG. 54) connected in series along the supply route of the control signal. A signal (when the address does not designate the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B) is supplied to the next conversion IC. The terminal CLK is connected to the terminal CLK of the next conversion IC, and the clock signal is supplied to the next conversion IC. The other terminals are grounded.

  The serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092 B operates in accordance with the clock signal supplied from the terminal CLK, and supplies the clock signal to the next conversion IC from the terminal CLK 0. When the control signal supplied from the terminal DATA designates its own address, the serial / parallel conversion IC 9092B latches the 24-bit information (High signal or Low signal) indicated by the control signal one bit at a time, and The information latched from Q0 to Q23 is output as a drive signal (High signal or Low signal). In addition, since the drive signal is output for each control signal that is repeatedly supplied, the light emission luminance of the RGB LEDs is adjusted according to the number of times the Low signal is supplied (the light emission luminance is controlled by PWM control). When the High signal is supplied, the LED is turned off. The light emission color and light emission luminance of each of the LEDs 90202A are adjusted according to the light emission luminance of RGB and the presence or absence of light emission. By adjusting a predetermined control signal, each LED 90202A can be made to emit light or emit light with a desired emission color and emission luminance. The current flowing through the LEDs 90202A at the time of light emission (the sum of the currents flowing through the LEDs) flows to the ground through the resistor R1. Since the current value of the current flowing through the LED 90202A depends on the resistor R1, the larger the resistance R1, the smaller the current value and the smaller the light emission luminance of the LED 90202A. In this embodiment, since the power supply line between VCL1 and VCL2 is made common, the potential of VCL2 may not be stable (in particular, it may be lowered) when a large current flows in the LED 90202A. Therefore, the resistance value of the resistor R1 is set large (here, the resistance value of the resistor R1 is 6 kΩ, but other resistance values may be used), and the light emission luminance of the LED 90202A (by one drive signal) Instead of lowering the light emission luminance when light is emitted, the current flowing to the LED 90202A may be reduced to stabilize the potential of VCL1 (this can stabilize the operation of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B). In this embodiment, the output of the power supply line L1 is branched by the power supply IC 541C, the capacitor C1 is connected to the power supply line supplying VCL1, and the capacitor C2 is connected to the power supply line supplying VCL2. Thus, the potentials of VCL1 and VCL2 can be stabilized (in particular, the potential of VCL1 can be stabilized, and the operation of the serial to parallel conversion IC 9092B can be stabilized).

  Furthermore, in the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B, the change timings of the drive signals output from the terminals Q0 to Q23 are dispersed using the built-in CR oscillation circuit. Specifically, FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing phase separation of drive signals output from serial to parallel conversion. Since the built-in CR oscillation circuit shown in FIG. 61 transmits a 6 MHz clock signal, the drive signal is separated into six layers as a 1 MHz PWM clock signal, and the output of 24 ch (terminals Q0 to Q23) of serial to parallel conversion IC 9092B It is divided into 6 groups of terminals and 1 group 4 ch, and the change timing of the drive signal is dispersed.

  The PWM clock signal of the drive signal which group 1 outputs from terminals Q0 to Q3 The PWM clock signal of the drive signal which group 2 outputs from terminals Q4 to Q7 The PWM of the drive signal which group 3 outputs from terminals Q8 to Q11 The clock signal is output from the terminals Q12 to Q23 as the PWM clock signal of the drive signal that the group 4 outputs from the terminals Q12 to Q15, the PWM clock signal of the drive signal that the group 5 outputs from the terminals Q16 to Q19 Each corresponds to the PWM clock signal of the drive signal. The PWM clock signals of each group are shifted in period by 1 MHz. When converting serial signals into parallel signals, the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B can shift the output cycle of parallel signals in units of groups to suppress radio wave radiation (noise generation) from the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B to the outside. It is an IC with a built-in function.

  However, when a motor or the like is driven, if the cycle shifts during rotation of the motor, the control accuracy is reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to limit connection to terminals (for example, terminals Q0 to Q3) of groups belonging to the same cycle. On the other hand, devices that do not accompany the operation, such as LEDs, are less affected by the period shift compared to drive control of a motor or the like, and therefore can be freely used without limiting the terminals of the group to be used. If the output terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B is 12 ch (terminals Q0 to Q11) instead of 24 ch (terminals Q0 to Q23), one group may be divided into 3 groups as 4 ch.

  Next, FIG. 62 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the gift drive unit 9091. The feature drive unit 9091 has a circuit configuration shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration of FIG. 62 is basically the same as the circuit configuration of FIG. 60, only different parts will be described. The same serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9092B and serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9091B can be used, and a drive driver 9091C and a drive mechanism (for example, a motor or the like) 201 are used instead of the LED 90202A. In FIG. 60 and FIG. 62, the connectors connected to the outside are the same. That is, the accessory drive unit 9091 includes the connector 9017A, and is connected to the outside by the connector 9017A. The connector 9017A has eight terminals. The fifth and sixth terminals are connected to an external power supply line to which VCL (voltage for driving the drive driver 9091 C or the like) is supplied, and the seventh terminal is for driving the VCC (serial / parallel conversion IC 9091 B or the like). Is connected to an external power supply line to which voltage is supplied, and the eighth terminal is grounded. In FIG. 62, VCL and VCC are supplied separately and are not shared (that is, the power supply line supplying power to drive driver 9091 C and the power supply line supplying power to serial / parallel conversion IC 9091 B are Are separate). Therefore, even if a large current flows in the drive driver 9091C, the voltage VCL is not affected, so that the resistance value of the resistor R2 can be smaller than that of the resistor R1, and the amount of current supplied to the drive driver 9091C can be increased.

  The feature drive unit 9091 converts the control signal supplied as a serial signal by the serial-to-parallel conversion IC 9091 B into drive signals for individually driving each stepping motor (generally plural) included in the drive mechanism 90201, and the drive signal The drive driver 9091 C supplies the output voltage for driving the drive mechanism 90201 to the drive mechanism 90201 based on the above.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. On the main board 9011, the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63 when it receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S9015 shown in FIG. 63 as the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S90101).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.
In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 65 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and loads it on the effect control board 9012. Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S9072: No), the processing of S9072 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, control to be an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command taken in at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at S9072 (S9072: Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (S9073), and command analysis processing is executed (S9074). In the command analysis process executed in S9074, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read and then read out. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in S9074, the effect control process process is executed (S9075). In the effect control process of S9075, for example, various operations such as the operation of displaying the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 905, the operation of sound output from the speaker 8, the light emitting operation in the first lamp unit 909, and the driving operation in the effect model Regarding control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of S9075, effect random number updating process is executed (S9076), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of effect control counter setting unit 193 are shown as various random number values used for effect control. Update the numerical data by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S9072. The various random number values updated in S9076 and used for effect control include various random number values such as MR6 'to MR12', in addition to the random number values for determining the final symbol to be described later.

  In S9074 of FIG. 65, the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. 66 is executed as command analysis processing. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9075 of FIG. 65 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 67, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes an effect determination process at the time of winning (S90150).

  First, a determination process of determining the display mode of the hold display when additionally displaying in the first hold display area 905D will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display. The ROM 90121 stores seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 68 (A) shows the suspension selected when the variation category "PA1 '(shortened / not reached lost)" or the variation category "PA2' (not reached (missed))" among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by a display mode determination table. FIG. 68B shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 ′ (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types. (H-TBL2). FIG. 68C shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode decision table selected when the variation category is “PA4 ′ (super reach α (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 68D shows the setting of the display rate determination ratio of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 ′ (super reach β (loss))” among the seven types described above. An example (H-TBL4) is shown in Fig. 68. E of the above-mentioned seven types, it is a suspension display by the suspension display mode decision table which is selected when it is a variation category "PB3 '(normal reach (big hit))" 68F is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the display aspect of FIG.68 (F) is selected when it is a fluctuation category "PB4 '(super reach alpha (big hit))" among the above-mentioned seven types. 68G shows a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table to be displayed. Richi is beta (big hit)) Configuration example of determining the proportion of hold display of the display mode by hold display mode decision table is selected when "a (H-TBL7).

  According to FIG. 68, the display mode of the hold display is determined by each of the tables (A) to (G), but the type of display mode to be determined is the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, It is roughly divided into three of the second specific display mode. The normal display mode is "sphere". The first specific display mode is a display mode (also referred to as a text icon) of an icon shape using “text”. The second specific display mode is a display mode (also referred to as a “character icon”) of an icon shape using a “character” formed of a “human-type character”. An example of a "sphere" is shown in FIG. Examples of the "character icon" are shown in FIGS. Examples of the "character icon" are shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. The icon-like hold display such as "character icon" and "character icon" is used for presentation as hold display of a specific display mode of a type different from the normal display mode by a general "sphere".

  The “sphere” suspension display is displayed as “red sphere”, “yellow sphere”, “blue sphere”, and “white sphere” on each table of FIG. For example, red and yellow are more likely to be determined when the "sphere" is to be reached, compared to the case where the reach is reached, and blue and white (initial colors) are less likely to be determined. In the case of a reach, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), red and yellow are more easily determined than when it is not hot (for example, normal reach), and blue and white are less likely to be determined. ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 48 and 68, when the special view display result is "big hit", red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special view display result is "loss", and blue and white are determined. It is difficult to do. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a high degree of expectation for performing a hot effect and a high probability of becoming a big hit, as compared with the blue and white display modes. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation for performing hot effects and the degree of expectation for becoming a big hit are high.

  The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "character" in each table of FIG. If it is determined to be "character", the newly added pending display will be the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the above-mentioned pending corresponding to the pending storage where the pending display is made Either of the display mode change effect and the variation-responsive display mode change effect may be performed.

  The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "Charakura" in each table of FIG. When it is determined to be "character", the newly added pending display is the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the above-described pending corresponding to the pending storage on which the pending display is made. Either of the display mode change effect and the variation-responsive display mode change effect may be performed.

  According to the table of FIG. 68, as understood with reference to the determination ratio of the random value MR6 ', the more the expectation of the big hit is the fluctuation display, the more the display of suspension by the character icon or the suspension of display by the character icon is selected. Rate is high. In this example, the higher the expectation of becoming a big hit, the higher the percentage of selection of the hold display by the character icon than the hold display by the character icon.

  After the winning-time effect determination process of S90150 shown in FIG. 67 is executed, any of the following processes of S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like, for example Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process of S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not variable display of the decorative design on the display device 905 is to be started. When it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of S90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on effect display device 905 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 904A or second special symbol display device 904B. Processing to determine the finalized decoration pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. in order to perform variable display of other various display operations, or by shifting the first hold display or the second hold display A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to an active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a production mode of various performances or various performances (for example, active display which is a main preview production) It includes a process of determining a change effect, and an effect mode of the active display change effect). Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192. The various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. Specifically, based on the read control data, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the effect display device 905 to display it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 9013. Then, various kinds of effect control such as control to output the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control to output the illumination signal to the first lamp drive unit 9014 to turn on / off / flash the first lamp unit 909 are executed.

  After such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or in response to receiving the symbol determination command transmitted from main substrate 9011, etc. The finalized stop symbol is displayed as a final stop symbol which is the result of the variable symbol display of the symbol. If the finalized display is made to display the finalized decorative symbol in response to the end code being read out from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed, Even without using the effect control command from the main substrate 9011, it is possible to derive and display the determined decoration pattern autonomously on the side of the effect control substrate 9012 to fix the variable display result. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  In S90173, the process for waiting for a special figure is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special drawing, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 has been received. Then, when the hit start designating command designates the start of the big hit gaming state when the hit start designating command is received, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit during the presentation processing “6”. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect processing. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", and the value of the effect process flag is an initial value. Update to "0".

  The small hitting middle effect process of S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this small hitting medium effect processing, for example the effect control CPU90120 sets the effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, variable S90172 Similar to the effect processing during display, various effects control in the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 9011, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting ending effect. .

  The small hitting end effect process of S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 90120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and changes S90172 Similar to the effect processing during display, various effects control at the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  The big hit inside effect process of S90176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit medium effect processing, for example the effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and displays variable in S90172. Similar to the effect processing, various effects control in the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Further, in the big hit internal rendering process, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 9011, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process.

  The ending effect process of S90177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and effects variable display in S90172. Similar to the processing, various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S90171 of FIG. 67 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 69, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, for example, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (S90522). When it is determined that the special view display result is "loss" (S90522; Yes), for example, the designated fluctuation pattern is read by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or the like. Non reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non reach" (that is, "PA1'-1", "PA2'-1", "PA2'-2", "PA2'-3" in FIG. 48) It is judged whether it is ")" (S90523).

  If it is determined in S90523 that it is a non-reach variation pattern (S90523; Yes), a combination of finalized design symbols to be a final stop design constituting a non-reach combination is determined (S90524). As an example, in the process of S90524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like By referring to a predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L in the display area of the effect display device 905 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like In the finalized decorative symbol, the right finalized decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" effect symbol display area 5R in the display area of the finalized decorative symbol is determined by referring to and the like. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting or the like in the right determined symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "in" effect symbol display area 5C in the display area of the effect display device 905 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In the process of S 905 24, the determined decorative symbol of the non-reach combination to be the predetermined chance symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol advance is being executed.

  If it is determined in S90523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (S90523; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop design constituting the reach combination is determined (S90525). As an example, in the process of S90525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for left and right fixed symbol determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like. Symbols displayed by stopping on the left and right presentation symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the effect display device 905 of the finalized decoration symbols by referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table etc. The number determines the same decorative pattern. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the finalized decorative symbol, the intermediate determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "in" effect symbol display area 5C in the display area of the effect display device 905 is determined.

  When it is determined in S90522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (S90522; No), the special view display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special view display result is " It is determined whether it is a "small hit" or a case other than these (S90526). When it is determined to be "probable" or "small hit" (S90526; Yes), for example, the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "probable" or "small hit", such as an open chance eye The combination of is determined (S90527). In this case, numerical data representing a random number value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined by referring to and the like.

  When it is determined in S90526 that "non-probability" or "probability" other than "probable" or "small hit" (S90526; No), the combination of the finalized decorative symbols that constitute the big hit combination is determined (S90528). As an example, in the process of S90528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for jackpot determination symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like of effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and then predetermined stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like The symbols on the screen of the effect display device 905 such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed stop together in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R by referring to the big hit finalized symbol determination table etc. The number determines the same decorative pattern. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the presence or absence of the promotion effect in the jackpot, etc., a determination may be made to set a different decoration pattern as the determined decoration pattern.

  When it is specified that the time is not short in the process of S90513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 66 (S90155: NO), the reserve digest process is executed after executing any of the processes of S90524, S90525, S90527, and S90528. (S90531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the present decorative symbol is in conjunction with the first special figure game), the first holding display area 905D The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first hold display area 905D is displayed) . More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 uses an effect control pattern for moving the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first hold display area 905D to the active display area AHA and displaying the active display. The right end of the first hold display area 905D is set by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the set effect control pattern, to the VDP of the display control unit 90123, etc. The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special drawing game.

  Further, in the process of S90531, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first hold display area 905D, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the other hold display in the first hold display area. If there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second hold display area 905U, the other hold display is shifted in the second hold display area 905U.

  After the process of S90531 is executed, an effect execution setting process is executed (S90532). In the effect execution setting process (S90532), a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change presentation for the active display corresponding to the change when the pending display is determined to be "sphere", when executing In the process of determining the type of the active display change presentation, the process of determining the presentation mode of the active display change presentation when executed, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change presentation when executed, and these processing results. The process etc. which set a production control pattern based on (or reset) are included.

  In addition, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), the display mode change effect execution timing selection process when the newly-displayed pending display is determined to the display mode of the icon shape such as the character icon or the character icon The display mode change effect type selection process, the icon effect setting process for executing the change mode selection process, the process for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the process results, and the like are further included.

  The display mode change effect execution timing selection process is an execution timing of a display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-responsive display mode change effect) corresponding to the pending storage in which the pending display is displayed in the icon shape of the character icon or character icon. Is a process of selecting and deciding. As shown in FIGS. 70 (B), (C), etc., the execution timing of such a suspension display is, for example, during suspension display after the first suspension display shift after the suspension display corresponding to the suspension storage appears. And the timing during the active display corresponding to the pending storage.

  The display mode change effect type selection process selects and determines the type of display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-responsive display mode change effect) of the pending display or active display of the icon shape of "character" or "character". It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 70 (D), (E) and the like, the type of such display mode change effect is selected and determined as any of the first change effect to the fourth change effect.

  The change mode selection process selects and decides the presentation mode of the display mode change presentation of the display of the icon shape of "character" or "character" (the suspension display mode change presentation or the variation-responsive display mode change presentation) or the display mode of the active display. It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 70 (F) to (M) etc., the effect modes of the display mode change effect of the character icon (pending display mode change effect or change-responsive display mode change effect) are "no change" and "appropriate" display It is selected and decided on either of and "superheating" display. The presentation mode of the display mode change presentation of the character icon (pending display mode change presentation or change corresponding display mode change presentation) is selected and determined to be "no change", "2 people" display or "3 people" display. Ru.

  After the processing of S90532 is performed, the execution setting of the effect during the other variable display is performed (S90533). As an example, in the process of S90533, execution setting of “one-shot notification effect” may be performed to immediately notify (determinately notify) that the variable display result will be “big hit” by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission . An example of the jackpot notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, and the like. An example of the jackpot notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp or the like. Further, in the process of S90533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, effects may be set to be executed in a predetermined manner for bustling. For example, the effect may be set such that the first lamp unit 909 emits light.

  After the process of S90533 is executed, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192 is set, for example, corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command (S90534). Subsequently, a change display start setting process is performed to perform setting for starting the change of the decorative symbol etc. in the effect display device 905 (S90535). For example, the effect display device is transmitted by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern in the effect execution setting process of S90532, to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 or the like. The sound output of the speaker 8 is made by transmitting to the sound control board 9013 the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of 905, transmitting the effect sound signal designated by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern, etc. For causing the first lamp unit 909 to start light emission by transmitting to the first lamp driving unit 9014 a setting for starting, an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern, or the like. Make settings.

  After executing the processing of S90535, the command stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B is digested (S90536). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special view game, effect control CPU 90120 is the smallest of the commands associated with first start winning reception command buffer 90194A. Command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning reception command buffer. While deleting the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands, The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of S90536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C or the second read notice notice buffer 90194D provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also performed according to the deletion or shift of the command. Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display rendering process (S90537), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (S90532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the change, and a process of determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a hold selection effect pattern table. In particular, FIG. 70A shows a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table. In FIGS. 70 (B) to 70 (M), when the hold display is determined to be a display mode of an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon, display mode change effect execution timing selection processing, display mode change effect type selection They are various data tables used for processing and the icon production setting processing which performs change mode selection processing.

  Specifically, in the setting example of FIG. 70 (A), when the display mode of the hold display is determined to be “sphere”, whether or not to execute the active display change presentation or the type of the active display change presentation (which It is an example of setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect of active display change presentation when performing active display change presentation (is performed). In the active display change presentation execution presence / absence decision table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR7 '(not shown) for active presentation change presentation execution presence determination are "execution present" and "execution not present" Are assigned at the determination rates as shown in FIG. 70. In addition, in “active” of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value MR7 ′ (not shown) for determination is “first system change effect”, The “second system change effect” and the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are allocated at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 70 (A). Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect acting on the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect acting on the display mode of the active display frame, and the first system change effect The target acting on the second system change effect is different.

  In addition, "execution yes" "first system change production" indicates that the first system change production is performed as an active display change presentation, "execution yes" "second system change presentation" is the second system change production "Execute" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" represent the effect of performing as an active display change effect, and the active display change is a change effect of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that the effect is to be made. Also, "execution not performed" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, fluctuation pattern 1'-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 shown in FIG. 48, and fluctuation pattern PA2'-X represents fluctuation pattern PA2'-1, PA2'-2, PA2'- shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3'-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3'-1 and PA3'-2 shown in FIG. 48, and the variation pattern PA4 'represents the variation pattern PA4' shown in FIG. -1, PA4'-2, PA4'-3 or PA4'-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5'-X, PB4'-X, and PB5'-X.

  Here, returning to FIG. 69 again, the variable display start setting process will be described continuously. In the effect execution setting process (S90532), the effect control CPU 90120 has a state in which the hold display by the character icon or the character icon is selected by the hold display mode determination table of FIG. Sometimes, for example, processing for realizing a display mode change presentation with the presentation contents selected and determined as described with reference to FIGS. 70 (B) to (M) is executed. For example, when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined to be in the hold display in FIG. 70 (B) or FIG. 70 (C), in the variable display started from now on, after the hold display shifts according to the hold digestion, As described above, setting processing is performed to execute the display mode change presentation with the presentation contents selected and determined.

  On the other hand, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display in FIG. 70 (B) or FIG. 70 (C), the active display corresponding to the pending storage The data specifying the content of the effect selected and determined as described above is associated with the data of the buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A corresponding to the pending storage to be the effect until the time the is executed. The display mode change data stored in the RAM 90122 is data for storing the change effect specifying data during active display designating execution of the display mode change effect, and specifying the contents of the effect selected and determined as described above. It is stored in the effect storage area. Then, at S90532 of the effect execution setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates whether the change display to be started from now is a change display corresponding to the pending storage of the effect object designated by the change effect designation data during active display Is determined, and when it is determined that the variable display corresponds to the pending storage of the effect object, the display mode change during active display based on the data specifying the content of the effect stored in the display mode change effect storage area Make a presentation.

  By executing the process described above, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), when the display mode of the hold display is selected by the character icon or the character icon and the display mode change effect is executed, the display mode During the first hold display after the hold display to be changed appears, or during active display when variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is executed, effect execution setting processing (S90532) The display mode change effect is executed based on the effect setting in the above.

  In addition, in the effect execution setting process (S90532), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table and the random number MR7 for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect for the pending display displayed as "sphere". Whether or not to execute the active display change rendition by the '' and the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the corresponding fluctuation (the variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, in the case of executing the active display change rendition Of the effects of the plurality of active display change effects, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  Note that the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the presence or absence of execution of the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be "executed", "first system change effect" or "second system change effect" or "first system change effect" And “the second system change effect” may be determined.

  FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of the display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. FIG. 71A shows an example in which the display mode change is performed after the display mode change effect is performed on the pending display or the active display. FIG. 71 (B) shows an example in which the display mode change is not performed after the display mode change effect is performed on the pending display or the active display.

  FIG. 72 shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. FIG. 72 (A) shows a character icon selection table, and FIG. 72 (B) shows a character selection table.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 72 (A), a character icon consisting of the characters “Caution” of the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears, and the effect selection of FIGS. 70 (F) to (I) The second change at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icon consisting of the character of "a chance" which can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the table and the effect selection table of FIGS. 70 (F) to (I) A character icon consisting of characters of "superheat" that can be selected as a display is set to be selectable. The expectation to the jackpot of these character icons has a relationship of "attention" <"opportunity" <"extensive heat".

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 72 (B), the character icon of “one person” in the normal display mode selected as the display at the time of appearance of the hold display and the effect selection table of FIGS. 70 (J) to (M) It can be selected as the second change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icon of "two people" which can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect and the effect selection table of FIGS. 70 (J) to (M) The "3 people" character icon is set to be selectable. The degree of expectation to the jackpot for these character icons has a relationship of “1” <“2” <“3”.

  Next, a change effect pattern table in which data for selecting one of the above-described first to fourth change effect effects is selected will be described. The change presentation pattern table is stored in the RAM 90122.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a change presentation pattern table. In the change effect pattern table, according to the types of the first change effect to the fourth change effect, the effect pattern when the change effect is selected during the hold display, and the selection to perform the change effect during the active display The effect pattern of the time is shown. Each of the selection for changing the effect during the hold display and the selection for changing the effect during the active display is performed using the data tables of FIGS. 70 (B) to (E).

  Next, an example of effect display when the character icon is displayed as the hold display will be described. FIG. 74 is a display screen view showing an example of effect display when the character icon 9061 is displayed on the effect display device 905 as a hold display.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), when a new first hold storage occurs, the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 68. A display for causing the first hold display area 905D to appear as a hold display by the character icon 9061 of “attention” display which is a normal display mode is displayed.

  The timing of the change effect is selected and determined as "on hold display" by the character hold display time change effect timing selection table of FIG. 70 (B), and the change effect type by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 70 (D) 74B is selected and determined to be "first change effect", while the hold display after the first hold shift after the appearance of the hold display by the character icon 9061 with the "attention" display is displayed in FIG. 74 (B). As shown, as the display mode change effect, a first change effect is performed in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display by the character icon 9061 indicating the "attention" display.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the display after the first change effect is selected and determined to be the “extensive heat” display by the first change effect pending display changing selection table of FIG. 70 (F). After execution of the display mode change effect by the change effect, in the first hold display area 905D, the hold display by the character icon 9061 is changed from the "attention" display to the "superheat" display. As described above, when the hold display by the character icon 9061 changes, the player's expectation for the jackpot regarding the hold display can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an example of effect display when the character icon is displayed as the active display after the hold display will be described. FIG. 75 is a display screen view showing an example of effect display of the active display after the character icon 9062 is displayed on the effect display device 905 as the hold display.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (A), when a new first hold storage occurs, the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 68. A display for causing the first hold display area 905D to appear as a hold display by the character icon 9062 of “one person” display which is a normal display mode is displayed. In the state of FIG. 75 (A), after the pending display by the character icon 9062 of “one person” display appears and appears, the previous pending display is digested and “1” is displayed as the pending display for the next variable display. A state is shown in which a hold display by the character icon 9062 "person display" is displayed.

  Then, the timing of the change effect is selected and determined as "actively displayed" by the character hold display time change effect timing selection table of FIG. 70 (C), and is changed by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 70 (E). When the effect type is selected and determined to be the “fourth change effect”, the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon 9062 displayed as “one person” as shown in FIG. 75 (B) is the active display area In AHA, it is performed by the character icon 9062 of "one person" display, and as shown in FIG. 75 (B), as the display mode change effect, the red arrow is horizontal to the active display by the character icon 9062 of "one person" display. A fourth change effect acting from the direction is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), when the display after the third change presentation is selected and determined to be “3 persons” display by the fourth change presentation active display change selection table of FIG. 70 (M), After the execution of the change effect by the fourth change effect, in the active display area AHA, the hold display by the character icon 9062 is changed from “one person” display to “three person” display. In this manner, when the active display by the character icon 9062 changes, the player's expectation for the big hit on the current variable display can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an iconic effect included in the effect execution setting process (S90532) for setting effects when performing a hold display by a character icon and a character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 70 (B) to (M) The setting process will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing icon effect setting processing. The process for setting the effect execution described above (S90532) for the process for setting the effect when performing the hold display or the active display by the character icon and the character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 70 (B) to (M). In the example of FIG. 76, in order to clarify the flow of the setting of the effect when the on-hold display or the active display by the character icon and the character icon is performed, the specific process of the icon effect setting process is performed. The processing content will be described.

  In the table of FIG. 68, when the hold display mode of the character icon or the character icon is selected and determined, the icon effect setting process is executed. In the icon effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the following process. First, the random value MR10 'is extracted, and a change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 70 (B) or FIG. 70 (C) is displayed according to the character icon or the character icon pending display mode selected in the table of FIG. Using either of “pending display” and “active display” is selected and determined as the execution timing of the display mode change presentation (S90700).

  Next, the random number value MR11 'is extracted, and it is shown in FIG. 70 (D) or FIG. 70 (E) according to the change presentation execution timing of "pending display" or "active display" selected and determined in S90700. Using the change presentation type selection table, select "1st change presentation" or "2nd change presentation" for "pending display", and "3rd change presentation" or "active display" The "fourth change effect" is selected and determined (S90701).

  Next, in S90701, it is determined whether "first change effect" is selected and determined (S90702). If it is determined in S90702 that "first change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S90700 whether "pending display" is selected and determined (S90703). When it is determined in S90703 that "pending display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 'is extracted to execute the first change presentation during the suspension display, and the first change presentation in FIG. 70 (F) is performed. Using the change display table during pending display, depending on the display result (big hit, lost), either “No change”, “Aptitude” display, or “Extreme heat” display, display change after the first change effect The mode is selected and determined (S90704), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90703 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), random number value MR12 is used to execute the first change presentation during active display. 70 '(G) using the change selection table in the first change effect active display of FIG. 70 (G), and according to the display result (big hit, lost), "no change", "appropriate" display, "super heat" display Any one of the above is selected and determined as the display change mode after the first change presentation (S90705), and the process is ended.

  When it is determined in S90702 that "first change effect" is not selected and determined in S90701, it is determined whether or not "second change effect" is selected and determined in S90701 (S90706). If it is determined in S90706 that "second change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S90700 whether "pending display" is selected and determined (S90707).

  When it is determined in S90707 that "pending display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 'is extracted to execute the second change presentation during the suspension display, and the second change presentation of FIG. 70 (H) is performed. Using the change display table during pending display, depending on the display result (big hit, lost), either “No change”, “Aptitude” display, or “Extreme heat” display, display change after the second change effect The mode is selected and determined (S90708), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90707 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), random number value MR12 is used to execute the second change presentation during active display. 70 ', using the second change production active display change selection table of FIG. 70 (I), according to the display result (big hit, lost), "No change", "Opportunistic" display, "Extreme heat" display One of the above is selected and determined as the display change mode after the second change presentation (S90709), and the process is ended.

  If it is determined in S90706 that the "second change effect" is not selected and determined, it is determined in S90701 whether the "third change effect" is selected and determined (S90710). If it is determined in S90710 that the "third change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S90700 whether or not the "pending display" is selected and determined (S90711). When it is determined in S90711 that "pending display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 'is extracted to execute the third change presentation during the suspension display, and the third change presentation in FIG. 70 (J) is performed. Using the change display table during hold display, according to the display result (big hit, lost), "No change", "2 people" display, "3 people" display, display after the third change effect The mode of change is selected and determined (S90712), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90711 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random value MR12 is selected to execute the third change effect during active display. 70 '(K) using the change selection table during the third change effect active display of FIG. 70 (K), "no change", "two" display, "three" according to the display result (big hit, lost) One of the displays is selected and determined as the display change mode after the third change presentation (S90713), and the process is ended.

  If it is determined in S90710 that "third change effect" is not selected and determined in S90701, it is determined whether or not "fourth change effect" is selected and determined in S90701 (S90714). If it is determined in S90714 that the "fourth change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S90700 whether or not the "pending display" is selected and determined (S90715). When it is determined in S90715 that "pending display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 'is extracted to execute the fourth change presentation during the suspension display, and the fourth change presentation in FIG. 70 (L) is made. Displayed after the 4th change effect using "no change", "2 people" display or "3 people" display according to the display result (big hit, lost) using the pending display change selection table The mode of change is selected and determined (S90716), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90715 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random value MR12 is selected to execute the fourth change effect during active display. 70 '(M) using the change selection table during the fourth change effect active display, "no change", "two" display, "three" according to the display result (big hit, lost) One of the displays is selected and determined as the display change mode after the fourth change presentation (S90717), and the process is ended.

  By the icon effect setting process described above, an effect using a character icon or a character icon is set, and a variable display effect process (S90172) is executed based on the setting in the process, for example, as shown in FIG. Such a pending display mode change effect and a variation-responsive display mode change effect as shown in FIG. 75 are executed.

[Modification of display mode change effect by icon display]
Next, various modified examples of the effects of the active display as described above will be described.

  (A) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 70 (B) to (M), FIG. 74, and FIG. 75, the total of one timing in the hold display and one timing in the active display is two. The example which made it possible to perform the display mode change presentation which changes the display mode of a character icon display or a character icon display at any one timing among four timings was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 77, the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display may be selectable from a plurality of timings.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of an effect of selecting the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the on-hold display from a plurality of timings. FIG. 77A shows a first hold display area 905D and an active display area AHA for describing the timing of the display mode change effect. FIG. 77 (B) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 70 (B). FIG. 77C shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 77 (A), in this modification, a character icon is displayed at any one of three timings of two timings in the hold display and one timing in the active display, Alternatively, it is possible to execute a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display. For example, in the first hold display area 905D, the two display mode change effect execution timings during the hold display are numbered “2” among the hold display areas to which the numbers “1” to “4” are given. When the hold display is shown in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the second oldest hold storage is displayed (during the first hold display), the first oldest hold storage with a number of “1” is displayed. There are two cases when the hold display is made in the display area in which the corresponding hold display is made (the second hold display is in progress).

  In this modification, as described above, the display mode change effect is executed at one selected timing from the three timings of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. In this modification, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 77 (B). In the table of FIG. 77 (B), similarly to the table of FIG. 70 (B), the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is set to be lower than during the hold display during active display. On the other hand, in this modification, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 77 (C). In the table of FIG. 77 (C), similarly to the table of FIG. 70 (C), the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is set to be lower than that during active display. By such setting, in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, this makes the effect more varied, and can further improve the enjoyment of the effect.

  Further, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, the selection ratio is set higher as the hold display area is closer to the hold display area where the hold display appears. As a result, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, when the display mode change effect is executed at the timing during the first hold display and when the display mode change is performed at the timing during the second hold display The selection ratio of “no change”, “appropriate” display, “superheat” display may be made different (for example, the higher the selection ratio is, the lower the selection ratio of “superheat” display).

  In this modification, for example, a part (two) of the four reserved display areas is targeted, and an example in which the display mode change effect can be executed during the reserved display has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be made executable during the hold display for all the hold display areas. Moreover, about active display, the period when execution of active display is continued is divided into a plurality of periods, and each of these plurality of periods is made into a period when display mode change production becomes executable, and any period is displayed mode change It may be selectable as a period for executing the effect. In this way, the rendition becomes more varied, and the interest of the rendition can be further improved.

  The timing at which the display mode change effect is executed includes the timings described in the embodiment and the modification described above, and among the plurality of timings during the suspension display period and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the target suspension storage, Any timing may be set as long as it is executed at any timing.

  (B) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 72, etc., when the hold display is made by the character icon, an example is shown in which the display form of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect. When the icon is displayed, an example is shown in which the display mode of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is made by the character icon, the character icon is a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio. You may make an effect that changes to another icon. In addition, when the hold display is made by the character icon, the effect of changing the character icon to another icon such as a character icon may be performed at a predetermined rate by the display mode change effect. If such an effect is given, the player can be made to pay attention that a change in the display mode of the specific display (the display mode of the icon) or a change in the type of the specific display (type of the icon) occurs. Interest can be further improved.

  In this modification, an icon display that can be displayed at the appearance of the hold display, such as a character icon and a character icon, may be used as the icon after the change, for example, and is not displayed at the appearance of the hold display. Specific icon displays may be used.

  (C) In the embodiment described above, an example has been shown in which display mode change effects such as shown in FIGS. 71 to 77 can be executed in any period of pending display and active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executable at both timings of the pending display and the active display.

  (D) In the embodiment described above, an example has been shown in which display mode change effects such as shown in FIGS. 71 to 77 can be executed at any one timing during the hold display period and the active display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be performed stepwise at a plurality of times during the hold display period and the active display period. In such a case, for example, the change mode of the icon display may be divided into a plurality of stages and may be selected, and the icon display may be selected and set to be able to change stepwise in a plurality of timings.

  (E) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the pending display or the active display targeted for the display mode change presentation as shown in FIGS. 71 to 77 is displayed in an icon shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending display or the active display to be the target of the display mode change effect may be a display mode different from the display mode (for example, "sphere") of the normal display, and is not limited to the icon shape. . Therefore, even if it is a sphere, the display mode different from the display mode such as the shape and color obtained by the normal display (for example, the size is different) And so on)).

  (F) If there are multiple types of pending display or active display (for example, the types of icon display selected at the time of pending appearance display) to be displayed for display mode change effects as shown in FIG. Among the plurality of timings during the display period and the active display period, the pending display period may include a type in which the display mode change effect is not executed at all, and the display mode change effect is executed at all during the active display period May not include the type.

  (G) In the embodiment described above, with regard to the pending display subject to the execution of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 71 to 77, the pending display is shown as shown in FIG. An example is shown in which only the display mode at the time of appearance display is selected and determined, but at such start-up winning (at the time of holding storage), a holding display or an active display as shown in FIGS. 70 (F) to (M) A final display mode (no change, “good opportunity”, “excessive heat”, “two people”, “three people”, etc.) after the pending display mode change production in may be selected and determined.

  (H) In the embodiment described above, the display mode of the hold display to be subjected to the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 71 to 77 may be a character icon as shown in FIG. 68, or Although the character icon is determined, the color of the character icon and the color of the character icon may be selected and determined as in the above-described "sphere". That is, the display mode of the hold display which is the execution target of the display mode change effect may be set such that the combination of the shape of the icon and the color of the icon can be selected and determined. Then, even for the same icon, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be set differently depending on the selected color.

  (I) The display mode change effect of the above-described icon display may be executed on condition that the number of held items is a predetermined number such as 3 or 4 or more.

  (J) The icon display in the hold display and the icon display in the active display do not have to be completely the same icon display. For example, the icon display in the hold display is displayed in a first color such as white, while the icon display in the active display is displayed in a second color such as black, etc. The display mode with the icon display during active display may be partially different. In addition, with regard to character icons, the characters of the icon in the hold display are displayed in the Mincho style, the characters of the icon in the active display are displayed in the block body, etc. . Further, with regard to the character icon, the icon in the hold display is displayed as a male character, the icon in an active display is displayed as a female character, etc. The number of persons may be the same but gender may be different.

  (K) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the hold display and the active display are displayed by the same display means (effect display device 905). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Display means having different hold display and active display (For example, the hold display may be displayed on the first effect display device, and the active display may be displayed on the second effect display device).

  (L) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the hold display and the active display are displayed using different display areas, but the present invention is not limited to this, and switching display may be performed using the same display area. It is preferable (for example, a display in which the active display area is not displayed when the hold display is displayed, and a display in which the hold display area is not displayed when the active display is performed).

  (M) In the embodiment described above, the effect mode (type) of the display mode change effect may be different depending on the display mode (character icon or character icon) of the icon display. For example, a dedicated display mode change effect corresponding to the display mode (render mode) of the icon display may be provided to execute the effect.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, an effect example using the movable member 90321 will be described. FIG. 78 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 905 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 79 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 905 when the story reach effect is executed.

  The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are executed by the effect control CPU 90120. The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are a plurality of special reach effects (super It is a specific super reach effect included in the reach effect). For example, the reach effect performed in the super reach α (big hit) of the change category “PB4 ′” shown in FIG. 48 is a battle reach effect, and is performed in the super reach β (big hit) change category of the change category “PB5 ′” Reach production is story reach production. Furthermore, in these super reach effects, the jackpot expectation is set, for example, in a relationship of battle reach effect <story reach effect. In addition, the big hit expectation degree of battle reach production and story reach production may be the reverse relationship of this.

  Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 905 and the effect operation of the movable member 90321 are combined.

  The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 78 will be described. In the variation display of the production symbols, the variation display of the production symbols is started at the same time in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” presentation symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, for example, “left”, “right” In accordance with the predetermined stop order such as “in”, the variable display of the production symbols is sequentially stopped in the production symbol display areas 905L, 905R, 905C, and finally, the production symbols are stopped in all the production symbol display areas. When the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the variation display of the production symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the same symbols are stopped at the stage when the production symbol display areas 905L and 905R of “left” and “right” are stopped, reach It becomes a state. The variable display up to the reach state is performed in the normal variation display mode, in which the normal reach and the super reach are not different. The normal reach and the super reach have different presentation modes after reaching the reach state.

  When a battle reach effect is executed as a reach effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are reduced. The small symbol display format is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 9053 in which the characters "battle reach" are displayed is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is informed that battle reach production is performed.

  In the battle reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 78C to 78E, a moving image in which an ally character 9061a (player's side) and an enemy character 9062a (player's side) fight (battle) A battle effect that displays an image (a effect including output of sound effects at the time of battle and music sounds at the time of battle) is executed.

  In the battle reach effect, when the variation display result is a big hit display result, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), a victory effect image display in which the teammate character 9061 a wins is displayed, and further in FIGS. 78 (D) and (E). As shown, an image in which the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed and displayed on the victory effect image is displayed, and the movable member 90321 operates at the upright position to execute the victory effect appearing in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 Be done.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variation display result is an out display result, a defeat effect of displaying an image in which the teammate character 9061 a is defeated is performed, and a particle effect image 9071 as shown in FIGS. 78 (D) and (E). And the effect using the movable member 90321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 78C, after the display in which the ally character 9061a and the enemy character 9062a appear is displayed, as shown in FIG. 78D, the ally character 9061a and the enemy character are displayed. A moving image of a battle with the 9062a is displayed. For example, FIG. 78 (D) shows a scene in which the teammate character 9061a attacks the enemy character 9062a. As shown in FIG. 78 (D), in a scene where the teammate character 9061a attacks in a battle effect (a scene suggesting victory), a particle effect image as effect effect display in the lower center area of the screen of the effect display device 905 By making 9071 appear, a particle effect effect is displayed to be superimposed on the victory effect display. When the ally character 9061a wins, as shown in FIG. 78E, a victory effect is performed in which an image capable of specifying that the ally character 9061a beats the enemy character 9062a and winning is displayed. Be done. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), when the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position, the movable body motion effect appearing in the central region of the display region of the effect display device 905 is present. Be done. Then, the movable member 90321 that has appeared is made to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 78E, when the movable member 90321 appears and moves to the upright position due to the movable body operation effect, the number of appearance display of the particle effect image 9071 to be superimposed and displayed increases around the movable member 90321. As a result, a moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 9071 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect to be performed using the particle effect image 9071 to enhance an effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect. By such an operation effect effect, an effect in which the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 9071 are associated is performed. By performing such an effect, an effect can be produced in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the message image 55 in which the big hit display result (the same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form, and the characters “Congratulations” are shown It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. As a result, it is notified that the player has won the battle reach effect (that has been a big hit). After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the effect design in which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol form is displayed by being restored to the original size and original position as shown in FIG. 79 (A). A stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 in which the character of "big hit" is shown is displayed below the effect symbol.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes the disappointing display result, the above-mentioned defeating effect is executed, and the outright displaying result is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form. The original size and position will be restored and displayed.

  Next, the story reach presentation shown in FIG. 79 will be described. After the variation display of the production symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), after the presentation symbols display areas 5L and 5R of “left” and “right” stop and reach the reach state, reach production When the story reach effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are reduced. The small symbol display format is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 9054A in which the characters "first half of story" are shown is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is informed that the story reach effect is to be executed.

  Story reach presentation is presentation in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story characteristic such as a specific story is displayed. In this example, the story reach effect is divided into two parts, a first half and a second half. In the story reach effect, when the story is not completed, the effect is ended halfway and the out-of-display result is derived and displayed, and the story continues to the end, the effect is completed and the big-hit display result is derived and displayed There is.

  When the variation display result is an out-of-display result, the effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the change display result is the big hit display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half An effect that continues until the time may be executed.

  In addition, in the story reach effect, the effect may be set so that the expectation of the big hit is higher when the effect is performed to the end than when the effect is ended in the first half. . Also, the story reach effect may be a one-part configuration that is not divided into the first half and the second half.

  After the message image 9054A is displayed, a moving image developed in accordance with the story corresponding to "the first half of the story" is displayed. When “the first half of the story” ends and “the second half of the story” is subsequently executed, as shown in FIG. 79C, a message image 9054B in which the text “the second half of the story” is displayed is displayed in the center of the screen. Ru. In this way, it is informed that the story reach effect will be continuously executed. In the story reach effect, an image notifying that it is a story reach effect such as the message images 9054A and 9054B may not be displayed.

  After the message image 9054 B is displayed, a moving image developed in accordance with the story corresponding to “the second half of the story” is displayed. In the story reach effect, when the variation display result is a big hit display result, the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. An image to be displayed is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 79E, the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position, and a story completion effect appearing in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variation display result is an out display result, a story incomplete effect which makes it possible to identify that the story is not completed is performed, and a black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) and (E). The effect using the flame effect image 9073 and the movable member 90321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is changed to a black image 9072 black, and in the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 905, A flame effect image 9073 as a presentation effect display is made to appear and an effect of being superimposed and displayed on the black image 9072 is performed. In the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position to appear in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 905. Will be Then, the movable member 90321 that has appeared is made to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 79E, when the movable member 90321 appears and moves to the upright position due to the effect of the movable body movement, the flame of the flame effect image 9073 superimposed and displayed around the movable member 90321 becomes large and the flame A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 9073 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect performed using the flame effect image 9073 to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 90321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. By such an operation effect effect, an effect in which the operation mode of the movable member 90321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 9073 are associated is performed. By performing such an effect, an effect can be produced in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), a big hit display result (the same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form, and the message image 55 in which the characters “Congratulations” are shown is displayed. It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is informed that the story reach effect has been completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the effect design in which the big hit display result is displayed in a small design form is displayed after being returned to the original size and original position as shown in FIG. 79 (A). A stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 in which the character of "big hit" is shown is displayed below the effect symbol.

  In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed as in the battle reach effect, but unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 905 is a black image, and the effect image is superimposed on the black image. As a result, the effect image can be further emphasized and displayed, and image display having a higher rendering effect than that of battle reach presentation can be performed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the valuable feeling (premium feeling) of the story reach production in which the expectation to the big hit is set higher than the battle reach production.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variation display result becomes the disappointing display result, the above-described story incomplete presentation effect is executed, and the disappointing display result is derived and displayed in the effect pattern displayed in the small symbol form. Is returned to its original size and position and displayed.

  The movable member 90321 may be configured to be capable of rotating by a drive unit such as a motor whose drive control is performed by the effect control CPU 90120. As described above, when the disc-like portion of the movable member 90321 is configured to be capable of rotation control, the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIG. When appearing or appearing in front of the display area of the device 905, control may be performed to rotate the disc-like portion. In that case, the effect display device 905 displays an image for operating an effect image such as the particle effect image 9071 of FIG. 78 (E) and the flame effect image 9073 of FIG. 79 (E) in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable member 90321. The effect control to be displayed in may be executed. By doing so, the rendering effect obtained by using the movable member 90321 and the effect image can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the movable member 90321 is not limited to rotational operation, and some or all of the constituent members perform a deformation operation such as opening / closing or contraction by drive means such as a solenoid whose drive is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120. In such a configuration, the effect display device 905 displays the information according to the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 905 in a specific effect scene. Effect control may be performed to display an image for operating the effect image.

  Next, a control example of effect presentation and movable object presentation in a specific super reach presentation such as battle reach presentation and story reach presentation will be described using a timing chart.

  FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of control of effect presentation and movable object presentation in a specific super reach presentation. FIG. 80 (A) shows an example of control of effect presentation and movable object presentation in battle reach presentation as shown in FIG. FIG. 80 (B) shows a control example of effect presentation and movable object presentation in the story reach presentation as shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80 (A), a control example of an effect effect and a movable body effect in a battle reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described. When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect pattern is displayed in the normal change display mode as shown in FIG. 78A from the start of the change display of the effect pattern (special symbol) to the time of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 78 (B) and (C), the message image 9053 is displayed and moving images such as battle effects corresponding to the battle reach effect are displayed. Be done. The timing at which the effect display device 905 changes the image display of the battle effect to the image display of the victory effect as shown in FIGS. 78 (D) and 78 (E) is the turning point of the first change of the image regarding the battle reach effect It is time to become a cut of the video cut). At the timing (the first video change node) at the turning point of the first change in the image regarding such battle reach effect, the particle effect image on the battle effect image as shown in FIGS. 78 (D) and (E) It is executed in a mode in which the particle effect effect of displaying an image in which the 9071 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 905 and the movable body operation effect of operating the movable member 90321 cooperate with each other.

  As the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIGS. 78E and 78F in the effect display device 905, the timing at which the image display of the victory effect changes to the image display of the reach result effect is battle reach It is time to be the turning point (break of video cut) of the second change of the video about the effect. At the timing (second video change node) at the turning point of the second video change related to such battle reach effect, the particle effect image 9071 is superimposed on the image of the winning effect as shown in FIG. 78 (E). Operation effect effects such as an image to be displayed are executed in the effect display device 905.

  Then, when the operation effect presentation and the movable body operation presentation end, the reach display is notified by executing the image display of the reach result presentation as shown in FIG. 78F in the presentation display device 905. Thereafter, when the reach result effect is finished, the stop display effect as shown in FIG. 78 (G) is executed in the effect display device 905, and the display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect design is performed, and the fluctuation display is performed. finish.

  As described above, in the battle reach effect, an effect effect display is performed such that the particle effect image 9071 is superimposedly displayed on the black image 9072 at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image regarding the reach effect. Furthermore, in the battle reach effect, at a timing when the change of the image regarding the reach effect is reached, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect effect display are linked is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (B), a control example of the effect presentation and the movable body presentation in the story reach presentation executed by the presentation control CPU 90120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect pattern is displayed in the normal variation display mode as shown in FIG. 79 (A) between the start of the variation display of the effect pattern (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  In the effect display device 905, when the reach state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 79B and 79C, the message images 9054A and 9054B are displayed, and the moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect The image is displayed. The timing of changing from the image display of the story effect to the image display of the story completion effect as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) and (E) in the effect display device 905 is the turning point of the first change of the image regarding the story reach effect. It is time to be (the cut of the video cut). At the timing (the first image change node) at the turning point of the first image change related to such a story reach effect, a flame effect image is displayed on a black image 9072 as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) and (E). It is performed in the aspect which the flame effect presentation which displays the image which superimposes 9073 is displayed on the presentation display apparatus 905, and the movable body operation presentation which operates the movable member 90321 cooperate.

  While the movable member 90321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIGS. 79E and 79F in the effect display device 905, the timing at which the image display of the story completion effect is changed to the image display of the reach result effect is the story It is time to be the turning point (break of video cut) of the second change of video about reach production. At the timing (second image change node) at the turning point of the second image change related to such story reach effect, the flame effect image 9073 is superimposed on the black image 9072 as shown in FIG. 79 (E). In the effect display device 905, an operation effect such as an image to be displayed is performed.

  Then, when the operation effect presentation and the movable body operation presentation end, the reach display is notified by performing the image display of the reach result presentation as shown in FIG. 79F in the presentation display device 905. After that, when the reach result effect is finished, the stop display effect as shown in FIG. 79 (G) is executed in the effect display device 905, and the display for confirming the stop pattern of the effect design is performed. finish.

  As described above, in the story reach effect, an effect effect display is performed such that the flame effect image 9073 is superimposedly displayed on the black image 9072 at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image regarding the reach effect. Furthermore, in the story reach effect, an effect in which a movable body effect such as the movable member 90321 and the effect effect display are linked is performed at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image regarding the reach effect.

  Specifically, in the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 78 and 80A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 79 and 80B, the following processing is executed in the effect control CPU 90120. Is realized by

  When a variation pattern designation command is designated in the production control substrate 9012 as a variation pattern designation command, in which among the variation pattern designation commands of super reach, a variation pattern of super reach of a type for executing battle reach effect is designated, The CPU 90120, in the variable display start setting process (S90171), performs image display control of the effect display device 905 performing battle reach effect and operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80A. The effect control data (process data etc.) is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 90122. Because the battle reach effect is partially different when the variation display result is the big hit display result and when it is the off display result, the fluctuation pattern specification command or the display result specification command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received. When the effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the content of the received command, the variable display result is recognized, and effect control data according to the variable display result is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts variable display of the effect pattern, and in the variable display effect process (S90172), using the effect control data set to execute battle reach effect, movable object effect process and effect By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 80A is executed.

  If a variation pattern designation command is designated in the production control substrate 9012 as a variation pattern designation command, in which a variation pattern of a type of super reach, among the variation pattern designation commands of super reach, is designated, as a variation pattern designation command. The CPU 90120, in the variable display start setting process (S90171), performs image display control of the effect display device 905 for providing story reach effect and operation control of the movable member 90321 as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 (B). The effect control data (process data etc.) is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 90122. The story reach effect is partially different depending on when the variation display result is a big hit display result and when it is an off display result, so a variation pattern specification command or display result specification command that can identify the variation display result is received. When the effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the content of the received command, the variable display result is recognized, and effect control data according to the variable display result is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the variable display of the effect pattern, and in the variable display effect process (S90172), using the effect control data set to execute the story reach effect, the movable body effect process and the effect are performed By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 905 and the operation control of the movable member 90321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 (B) is executed.

  As in the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 80 (A) and the story reach effect shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. Depending on which kind of effect display is performed, such as an effect effect display of an aspect in which an effect image is superimposed and displayed on a black image, and an effect effect display of an aspect in which an effect image is superimposed and displayed on an effect image Since the presentation effect display of a different aspect can be displayed, the presentation effect in which the operation of the movable body and the presentation effect display of the display means are linked can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 78E and 80A, a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect is performed in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is performed. It is possible to execute an effect that superimposes the effect effect display of a specific aspect such as the particle effect image 9071 of FIGS. 78 (D) and (E) on a specific type of effect display such as the display of a victory effect image. Therefore, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable object effect is executed and the effect effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 905, and the operation of the movable object by the effect display of the specific type It is possible to further enhance the rendering effect in which the display effect and the rendering effect of the display means are linked.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 79 (E) and 80 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect is performed in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 90321 is performed. 79 (D), (E) of the effect effect display of the specific aspect like the flame effect image 9073 of FIG. 79 (D), (E), a predetermined image displayed over the entire display area of the effect display device 905 like the black image 9072. In addition to the fact that effects to be displayed in a superimposed manner can be performed, it is possible to cooperate between predetermined types of predetermined effects for which movable object effects are executed and effect effects displayed by display means such as the effect display device 905. It is possible to emphasize the movable body effect and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the production which makes a movable body and production effect display cooperate (linkage) like battle reach production and story reach production which were mentioned above may be performed in reach production other than super reach, and is performed in production other than reach production You may

  Also, as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display has been described as an example executed at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image regarding the effect The present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed at a timing other than the timing of the turning point of the change in the image related to the effect such as the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the execution of the effect.

  Although the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example as the effect effect display in the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, Not limited to this, as the effect effect display, other types of effect effect display such as an effect image of an aspect in which light is emitted may be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 79, among the two types of effect display of battle reach effect and story reach effect, it is possible to display effect effects of different modes depending on which effect display is performed. Although the example was made into, although it was not limited to this, according to which effect display is performed among three or more types of multiple effect displays, the effect effect display of a different aspect is good also as displayable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 79, among a plurality of effect displays such as battle reach effects and story reach effects, effect effects of different modes are displayed depending on which effect display is performed. When making it possible, the example which varied the aspect of a presentation effect display was shown by whether the black image 9072 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the aspect of the rendering effect display is different, a black image is displayed for any type of rendering display, but the type of rendering effect display such as an effect image may be different. In this case, the type of the rendering effect display may be different if any of the components of the rendering effect display such as the shape, color, display range, and luminance of the rendering effect display image is different.

  Further, as effects for linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, images of the effect effect display as shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 79 are displayed first It is not limited to the effect of operating the movable body later, but may be an effect of executing the image display of the effect effect display and the operation of the movable body at the same timing, or the image of the effect effect display after moving the movable body first. You may use the presentation which displays.

  Further, as an effect using the black image 9072 as in the above-described story reach effect, an example in which the black image 9072 is displayed over the entire display area of the effect display device 905 has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control may be performed to display the black image 9072 in a partial display area of the effect display device 905 such as an area for displaying an effect image.

  In addition, as an effect of linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and a rendering effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated in each of a plurality of types of rendering display different in the situation of the rendering display. When performing effects, effects may be displayed such that effect image displays as different types of effect effects are linked to the movement of the movable body depending on the state of the effect display for operating the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be performed in the following situation of effect display. (A) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to moving the movable body before reaching the reach state during the variable display of the effect pattern. (B) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body at the time of temporary stop in pseudo run. (C) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating the movable body during execution of normal reach. (D) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating the movable body during the execution of the super reach effect. (E) When displaying the effect image display corresponding to operating the movable body at the time of development of the effect during the execution of the super reach of the development effect format in which the content of the development develops. (F) Corresponds to operating the movable body when the lottery effect (for example, an effect such as lottery for deciding whether to be a big hit or a non big hit) is made again after notifying that the big hit display result is reached. To display the effect image display. (G) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during production of a big hit gaming state. (H) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during a customer waiting demo display which is executed when a game is not performed. Note that at least two of the effect image displays to be executed in the situation of the plurality of types of effect display as described above may be different.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) The gaming machine according to the above embodiment
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.),
Control means (for example, drive mechanism 90201 (various motors), solenoids, sensors, second lamp unit 90202, third lamp unit 90203, fourth lamp unit 90204, fifth lamp unit 90205, etc.) For example, CPU 90120 for effect control, VDP 90123 A, dedicated IC, etc.),
And output means (for example, serial-to-parallel conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B) for outputting a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control means.
The output means stops the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period T in FIG. 56) elapses from the reception of the control signal (for example, time t1 in FIG. 56) (FIG. 56: timeout) Function),
When the control means outputs a control signal to continuously drive the electronic component over the predetermined period, the control means outputs the control signal until the predetermined period elapses (for example, from time t1). The control signal is output until the predetermined period T elapses.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation failure of the electronic component can be avoided, the electronic component can be controlled more stably.

(2) In gaming machines,
The output means includes conversion means (for example, serial / parallel conversion ICs 9091 B to 9095 B) for converting a control signal of serial signal system output from the control means into a drive signal of parallel signal system.

According to the above configuration, the number of communication wires between the control means and the output means can be reduced.
(3) In gaming machines,
It further comprises setting means for setting the stopping means to be valid or invalid (a predetermined terminal for setting the time-out function of each conversion IC to be valid or invalid, effect control board 9012 or the like).

  According to the above configuration, since the function of the stopping means can be changed to be valid or invalid according to the application, cost reduction can be achieved by the common use of parts.

(4) In gaming machines,
A first substrate (for example, effect control substrate 9012 or the like) provided with the control means;
And a second substrate (e.g., a first lamp substrate 90210) provided with the output unit.
The first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected via a wiring member (flexure, harness or the like).

  According to the above configuration, since it is disposed on another substrate, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a control abnormality that may occur due to a defect in the wiring (such as disconnection or short circuit).

(5) In gaming machines,
The output means controls the drive of the electronic component by outputting a PWM signal as a drive signal (for example, the drive signal is PWM controlled by the number of times of the Low signal, and the light emission luminance of each LED is light emission by PWM control) The gradation is controlled by the period.)

According to the above configuration, power efficiency can be improved by PWM control.
(6) In gaming machines,
The output means is
The output state when the input control signal is output to another output means is a first output state where the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the output state of the normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58A), It can be set to any output state with the second output state (for example, the output state with low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58 (b), etc.) where the waveform rises in a gradual change mode than the first output state.
When the other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means, the other output means is set to the second output state (for example, connected in the substrate like the conversion IC 9092 B and the conversion IC 9093 B) In this case, the conversion IC 9092B is set to output a low slew rate waveform).

  According to the above configuration, since the output state when outputting in the same substrate is set to the second output state, it is possible to suppress the radiation of noise to the outside of the substrate.

(7) In gaming machines,
The output means is
The output state when the input control signal is output to another output means is a first output state where the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the output state of the normal slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58A), It can be set to any output state with the second output state (for example, the output state with low slew rate setting shown in FIG. 58 (b), etc.) where the waveform rises in a gradual change mode than the first output state.
When the other output means is provided on the other substrate connected to the substrate on which the output means is provided via the wiring member, the first output state is set (for example, conversion When the IC 9094 B and the conversion IC 9095 B are connected outside the substrate, the conversion IC 9094 B is set to output the waveform of the normal slew rate).

  According to the above configuration, since the output state when outputting to another substrate connected via the wiring member is set to the first output state, the influence of external noise on the control signal can be suppressed.

(8) In gaming machines,
It further comprises a movable member (for example, effect unit 90300 etc.) that operates.
The output unit outputs a parallel communication specific signal from specific signal output units (for example, terminals Q0 to 23 corresponding to groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 61) grouped into a plurality of different groups,
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, the PWM clock signals of groups 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 61 are shifted in period by 1 MHz),
The drive means (for example, motor of drive mechanism 90201 etc.) which operates the movable member is the terminal (for example, terminals Q0 to Q3) of the group belonging to the same cycle of the same group of the output means (for example, same cycle) Driven based on the specific signal output from

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the radiation of noise to the outside of the substrate by shifting the output period of the specific signal in the parallel communication system.

(9) In gaming machines,
The gaming machine performs variable display, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means (for example, first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, first start winning reception command buffer 90194A, second When receiving the start winning reception command buffer 194B etc),
Hold display means (eg, effect display device 905, RAM 90102, first hold display area 905D, second hold display area 905U, etc.) capable of displaying the hold storage stored by the hold storage means as a hold display (eg, hold display etc.) )When,
Variation response display means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, S90532 in FIG. 69, etc.) capable of performing a variation response display (for example, an active display) corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display;
Hold display mode change (for example, change during hold display in FIG. 74) for changing the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and the mode of the change correspondence display during the execution of the change display A plurality of display mode changes (for example, change during active display in FIG. 75) to change the display mode change corresponding to the target storage for which the change is made and the plurality of display mode changes during the variable display period Display mode changing means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, S90532 in FIG. 69, icon effect setting process in FIG. 76, S90172 in FIG. 67, etc.) that can be executed at any of the timings of Equipped
The display mode changing means is a first specific display (for example, character icon display in FIG. 72A) and a second specific display (FIG. 72B) in which the type of display of the change target is different from the normal display Depending on which of the icon display), the selection ratio of the timing to execute the display mode change is different (as shown in FIG. 70 (B) and (C), the character icon display changes during the hold display) The execution ratio is high, and the character icon display has a high change effect execution ratio during active display, and as shown in (F) to (M) in FIG. The display is the same as the active display, so depending on whether it is a character icon display or a character icon display, a table of icons is displayed in the hold display and the active display. Aspects different frequency of changes, the rate of selecting or changing a display form in either an in active display and pending displays different.).

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display type of the change target and the timing of the display mode change for the suspension display mode change and the variation-responsive display mode change, and the change of the suspension display mode is It can improve the interest.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but various devices including the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the processing shown by the flowchart, and the display operation of effect images in the display area of the effect display device 905 The rendering operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  (2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, with respect to any of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U, If there is a hold display displayed in a special mode in any of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U, the first hold display area may be executed. The on-hold change presentation or the active display change presentation may be executed on any one of the on-hold displays displayed in the second on-hold display area 905 U or on the active display.

  (3) The first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, the first hold display area 905D, the second hold display area 905U, the first hold change area 905 U, such as a first turn change effect to change the shape or a second turn change effect to change the line thickness of the active display frame. A color (for example, in the case of the hold display that has been displayed in blue) that the expectation of the big hit is higher than the color of the hold display displayed in the hold display displayed in the hold display area 905D and the second hold display area 905U The color of the display mode of the active display may be changed so that the display mode of yellow, red, etc.).

  (4) For example, the “displayed” and “not displayed” states of the active display change effect of the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X” in the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. "Performed" and "Execute" like 45% (the sum of system change effect 15%, system 2 change effect 10%, system 1 change effect and system 2 change effect 20%) vs 55% The ratio may be set to “none”, and the ratio between “execution present” and “execution not present” is 0% to 100% as in the variation pattern “PA1′-X” in FIG. 70. The ratio according to this embodiment may be set such that one of the plurality is set as 0%.

  (5) In the probability change control, a gaming machine may be provided in which a specific area is provided in advance in the special winning opening, and controlled to a probability change state based on passage of the gaming ball through the specific area. For example, the game ball enters a specific area in the special winning opening by being assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability" based on the random number value MR2 'for determining jackpot type It may be a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a gaming state that is easy to make, and is controlled to be in a definite variation state based on passage of a gaming ball through this specific area.

  (6) Using the frequency which is the gaming value of the size specified by the recorded information of the game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in the game is given and given. The present invention is also applied to a gaming machine (enclosed type gaming machine) in which a player plays a game by hitting a gaming ball enclosed in a gaming machine using a gaming score or a gaming score given by winning a game. It can apply.

  (7) Although the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated in the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100% Among them, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value excluding 0% and 100% may be used.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, after the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, after the end of the big hit gaming state, showed the example of the probability variation state control unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. However, not limited to this, the probability variation determination device controlled to a probability variation state when the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  (9) In addition, although embodiment which mentioned above demonstrated the structure which CPU90120 (and VDP90123A) for presentation control outputs a control signal, it is not restricted to the said structure. For example, a dedicated IC having an output function of the control signal as described above may be provided in the effect control board 9012 separately from the effect control CPU 90120 (and VDP 90123A), and may be output by the dedicated IC .

  (10) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 special variable winning ball device 22 variable ball entering device 25 2nd out opening 26 first out port 27 speaker 31 game control board (main board)
33 Regular winning gate 50 Winning combination 51 Secondary effect display 56 CPU
70 audio output board 560 microcomputer for game control 80 effect control board 100 microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP
901 Pachinko gaming machine 90151A 1st special view storage section 90151B 2nd special view storage section 90194A 1st start winning reception command buffer 90194 B 2nd start winning reception command buffer 905 effect display device 90102 RAM
905D 1st hold display area 905U 2nd hold display area 90120 CPU for effect control
AHA active display area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
A predetermined area through which game media can pass;
A special area different from the predetermined area through which game media can pass;
A special entry section into which game media can enter after passing through the special area;
Control means for controlling a plurality of electronic components;
An output unit that outputs a drive signal for driving the electronic component based on a control signal output from the control unit ;
Equipped with
The output means is
Stopping means for stopping the output of the drive signal after a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the control signal ,
Setting means for setting whether or not it is effective to stop the output of the drive signal by the stop means;
Including
When the control means outputs a control signal and continuously drives the electronic component beyond the predetermined period, the control signal is output again before the predetermined period elapses after the control signal is output. Output
In the predetermined area, when the game medium passes, variable display is started and the game medium is given,
While the special area does not start variable display even when game media pass, game media is given by passing game media,
Gaming machine has been passed through the special area, characterized in that Ru equipped with special discharge area for discharging the game medium has not entered into the special entry portion.